Part Number Hot Search : 
013TR BR102 SUP85N NTE4923 WMN6T 2SK306 SD05C SD05C
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP86CS25AFG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/C Series
TMP86CS25AFG
TMP86CS25AFG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023 _ D TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A The Toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These Toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of Toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C The products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_F For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
(c) 2006 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All Rights Reserved
Page 2
Revision History
Date 2005/12/21 2006/2/13 2006/7/10 2006/7/27 2006/9/4 2006/11/13 Revision 1 2 3 4 5 6 First Release Contents Revised Periodical updating.No change in contents. Periodical updating.No change in contents. Contents Revised Contents Revised
Table of Contents
TMP86CS25AFG
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 4 5
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 9 Program Memory (MaskROM).................................................................................................................. 9 Data Memory (RAM) ................................................................................................................................. 9 Clock Generator...................................................................................................................................... 10 Timing Generator .................................................................................................................................... 12 Operation Mode Control Circuit .............................................................................................................. 13
Single-clock mode Dual-clock mode STOP mode Configuration of timing generator Machine cycle
2.2
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3
System Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 2.2.4.4
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control ......................................................................................................................... 18
STOP mode IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0) SLOW mode
2.3
Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
External Reset Input ............................................................................................................................... 31 Address trap reset .................................................................................................................................. 32 Watchdog timer reset.............................................................................................................................. 32 System clock reset.................................................................................................................................. 32
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Interrupt latches (IL15 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Interrupt Source Selector (INTSEL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 39 Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 40 Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 42
Using PUSH and POP instructions Using data transfer instructions
3.2.1 3.2.2
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 36 Individual interrupt enable flags (EF15 to EF4) ...................................................................................... 36
3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.5.1 3.5.2
3.4.2.1 3.4.2.2
3.5
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 43 Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 43
i
3.6 3.7 3.8
Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 4.2 SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5. I/O Ports
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 Port P1 (P17 to P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P2 (P22 to P20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P3 (P36 to P30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P5 (P57 to P50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P6 (P67 to P60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P7 (P77 to P70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi Function Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.1 6.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ................................................................... Watchdog Timer Enable ......................................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................ Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)...................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Reset ........................................................................................................................... Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS) ................................................................................ Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT) .................................................................................. Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)....................................................................................................... Address Trap Reset ................................................................................................................................ 62 63 64 64 65
6.3
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5
Address Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
66 66 66 67
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 69 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 69 Function .................................................................................................................................................. 70 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 71 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 71 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2.1 7.2.2
7.2
Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.1 8.2 8.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ii
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4
Timer mode............................................................................................................................................. 77 Event Counter mode ............................................................................................................................... 78 Pulse Width Measurement mode............................................................................................................ 79 Frequency Measurement mode .............................................................................................................. 80
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 9.2 9.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ................................................................................................................ 89 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4) ........................................................................................................ 90 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)..................................................................... 90 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4).................................................................. 93 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) .............................................................................................................. 95 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4) ................................................................................................ 96 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4).......................................................... 96 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................... 99 Warm-Up Counter Mode....................................................................................................................... 101
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9
9.3.9.1 9.3.9.2
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 10.2 10.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................................ 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC6) ........................................................................................................ 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC6)..................................................................... 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC6).................................................................. 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) .......................................................................................................... 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)...................................................... 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6) ........................................... Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8
108 109 109 112 114 115 118 120
10.3.8.1 10.3.8.2
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 128 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 128 Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... 129
123 124 126 127 127 128 128 128
11.8.1 11.8.2 11.9.1
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
iii
11.9.2 11.9.3 11.9.4 11.9.5 11.9.6
Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
129 129 130 130 131
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO0)
12.1 12.2 12.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Serial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Clock source ....................................................................................................................................... 135 Shift edge............................................................................................................................................ 137
Leading edge Trailing edge Internal clock External clock 12.3.1.1 12.3.1.2 12.3.2.1 12.3.2.2
12.3.1 12.3.2
12.4 12.5 12.6
Number of bits to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Number of words to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes ............................................................................................................. 138 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes ............................................................................................................. 140 8-bit transfer / receive mode ............................................................................................................... 141
12.6.1 12.6.2 12.6.3
13. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
13.1 13.2 13.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Serial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Clock source ....................................................................................................................................... 145 Shift edge............................................................................................................................................ 147
Leading edge Trailing edge Internal clock External clock 13.3.1.1 13.3.1.2 13.3.2.1 13.3.2.2
13.3.1 13.3.2
13.4 13.5 13.6
Number of bits to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Number of words to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes ............................................................................................................. 148 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes ............................................................................................................. 150 8-bit transfer / receive mode ............................................................................................................... 151
13.6.1 13.6.2 13.6.3
14. 8-Bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.1 14.2 14.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
AD Conveter Operation ...................................................................................................................... AD Converter Operation ..................................................................................................................... STOP and SLOW Mode during AD Conversion ................................................................................. Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result ............................................................................... 156 156 157 158
14.4
14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.3 14.3.4 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3
Precautions about AD Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... 159 Analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... 159 Noise countermeasure........................................................................................................................ 159
iv
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
15.1 15.2 15.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
16. LCD Driver
16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 Configuration of LCD Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Controlling LCD Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 LCD Booster Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Methods of Connecting LCD Booster Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 LCD Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Method of Controlling LCD Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Initial setting ........................................................................................................................................ 168 Storing display data ............................................................................................................................ 168 Setting display data ............................................................................................................................ 167 Blanking .............................................................................................................................................. 168 Method of connecting booster circuit by using a regulator ................................................................. 166 Method of connecting booster circuit without using a regulator .......................................................... 166 Frame frequency................................................................................................................................. 165
16.2.1
16.4.1 16.4.2 16.5.1 16.5.2
16.6.1 16.6.2
17. Input/Output Circuitry
17.1 17.2 Control Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Operating Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD Conversion Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer Counter 1 input (ECIN) Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Oscillating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 176 177 178 179 179 180 180
19. Package Dimension
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
v
vi
TMP86CS25AFG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP86CS25AFG
Product No. TMP86CS25AFG ROM (MaskROM) 61440 bytes RAM 2048 bytes Package P-QFP100-1420-0.65A OTP MCU TMP86PS25FG Emulation Chip TMP86C925XB
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/C series - Instruction execution time : 0.25 s (at 16 MHz) 122 s (at 32.768 kHz) - 132 types & 731 basic instructions 2. 20interrupt sources (External : 5 Internal : 15) 3. Input / Output ports (42 pins) Large current output: 4pins (Typ. 20mA), LED direct drive 4. Watchdog Timer 5. Prescaler - Time base timer - Divider output function 6. 18-bit Timer/Counter : 1ch - Timer Mode - Event Counter Mode - Pulse Width Measurement Mode - Frequency Measurement Mode 7. 8-bit timer counter : 4 ch - Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO), Pulse width modulation (PWM) output,
060116EBP
* The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D * TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A * The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunctionor failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B * The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q * The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C * The products described in this document are subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_E * For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP86CS25AFG
Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes 8. 8-bit UART/SIO : 1 ch 9. 8-bit SIO: 1 ch 10. 8-bit successive approximation type AD converter (with sample hold) Analog inputs: 8ch 11. Key-on wakeup : 4 ch 12. LCD driver/controller Built-in voltage booster for LCD driver With displaymemory LCD direct drive capability (60 seg x 16 com, 60 seg x 8 com, 60 seg x 4 com) 1/16,1/8,1/4 duties or static drive are programmably selectable 13. Clock operation Single clock mode Dual clock mode 14. Low power consumption operation STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.) SLOW1 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock stop.) SLOW2 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock oscillate.) IDLE0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. IDLE1 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs(CPU restarts). IDLE2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. Release by interruputs. (CPU restarts). SLEEP0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using low frequency clock.Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. SLEEP1 mode: CPU stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. Release by interruput.(CPU restarts). SLEEP2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. interruput. 15. Wide operation voltage:
4.5 V to 5.5 V at 16.0MHz /32.768 kHz 2.7 V to 5.5 V at 8.0 MHz /32.768 kHz 1.8 V to 5.5 V at 4.2MHz /32.768 kHz
Release by
Page 2
1.2 Pin Assignment
COM2 COM3 COM4 (COM5/MUL4) P34 (COM6/MUL5) P35 (COM7/MUL6) P36 (COM8) P70 (COM9/MUL0) P71 (COM10/MUL1) P72 (COM11/MUL2) P73 (COM12/MUL3) P74 (COM13/SI1) P75 (COM14/SO1) P76 (COM15/SCK1) P77 V4 V3 V2 V1 C1 C0
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
VSS XIN XOUT TEST VDD (XTIN) P21 (XTOUT) P22
RESET
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
Page 3
(INT5/STOP) P20 (AIN0) P60 (ECIN/AIN1) P61 (ECNT/AIN2) P62 (INT0/AIN3) P63 (STOP2/AIN4) P64 (STOP3/AIN5) P65 (STOP4/AIN6) P66 (STOP5/AIN7) P67 VAREF (SCK0/SEG59) P17 (SO0/TXD/SEG58) P16 (SI0/RXD/SEG57) P15 (MUL6/SEG56) P14 (MUL5/SEG55) P13 (MUL4/SEG54) P12 (SEG53) P11 (SEG52) P10 (MUL3/SEG51) P33 (MUL2/SEG50) P32 (MUL1/SEG49) P31 (MUL0/SEG48) P30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
COM1 COM0 SEG0 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 SEG8 SEG9 SEG10 SEG11 SEG12 SEG13 SEG14 SEG15 SEG16 SEG17 SEG18 SEG19 SEG20 SEG21 SEG22 SEG23 SEG24 SEG25 SEG26 SEG27
50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
SEG28 SEG29 SEG30 SEG31 SEG32 SEG33 SEG34 SEG35 SEG36 SEG37 SEG38 SEG39 P50 (SEG40) P51 (SEG41) P52 (SEG42) P53 (SEG43) P54 (SEG44) P55 (SEG45) P56 (SEG46) P57 (SEG47)
TMP86CS25AFG
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP86CS25AFG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP86CS25AFG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/4)
Pin Name P17 SEG59
SCK0
Pin Number
Input/Output IO O IO IO O O O IO O I I IO O I IO O I IO O I IO O IO O IO O PORT17 LCD segment output 59 Serial Clock I/O 0 PORT16 LCD segment output 58 UART data output Serial Data Output 0 PORT15 LCD segment output 57 UART data input Serial Data Input 0 PORT14 LCD segment output 56 Multi Function 6 pin PORT13 LCD segment output 55 Multi Function 5 pin PORT12 LCD segment output 54 Multi Function 4 pin PORT11 LCD segment output 53 PORT10 LCD segment output 52
Functions
19
P16 SEG58 TXD SO0 P15 SEG57 RXD SI0 P14 SEG56 MUL6 P13 SEG55 MUL5 P12 SEG54 MUL4 P11 SEG53 P10 SEG52 P22 XTOUT
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
7
PORT22 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT21 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT20 STOP mode release signal input External interrupt 5 input PORT36 Multi Function 6 pin LCD common output 7 PORT35 Multi Function 5 pin LCD common output 6 PORT34 Multi Function 4 pin LCD common output 5 PORT33 LCD segment output 51 Multi Function 3 pin PORT32 LCD segment output 50 Multi Function 2 pin
P21 XTIN P20
STOP INT5
6
IO I IO I I IO I O IO I O IO I O IO O I IO O I
9
P36 MUL6 COM7 P35 MUL5 COM6 P34 MUL4 COM5 P33 SEG51 MUL3 P32 SEG50 MUL2
86
85
84
27
28
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86CS25AFG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/4)
Pin Name P31 SEG49 MUL1 P30 SEG48 MUL0 P57 SEG47 P56 SEG46 P55 SEG45 P54 SEG44 P53 SEG43 P52 SEG42 P51 SEG41 P50 SEG40 P67 AIN7 STOP5 P66 AIN6 STOP4 P65 AIN5 STOP3 P64 AIN4 STOP2 P63 AIN3
INT0
Pin Number
Input/Output IO O I IO O I IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I IO IO O PORT31 LCD segment output 49 Multi Function 1 pin PORT30 LCD segment output 48 Multi Function 0 pin PORT57 LCD segment output 47 PORT56 LCD segment output 46 PORT55 LCD segment output 45 PORT54 LCD segment output 44 PORT53 LCD segment output 43 PORT52 LCD segment output 42 PORT51 LCD segment output 41 PORT50 LCD segment output 40
Functions
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
17
PORT67 AD converter analog input 7 STOP5 input PORT66 AD converter analog input 6 STOP4 input PORT65 AD converter analog input 5 STOP3 input PORT64 AD converter analog input 4 STOP2 input PORT63 AD converter analog input 3 External interrupt 0 input PORT62 AD converter analog input 2 ECNT input PORT61 AD converter analog input 1 ECIN input PORT60 AD converter analog input 0 PORT77 Serial Clock I/O 1 LCD common output 15
16
15
14
13
P62 AIN2 ECNT P61 AIN1 ECIN P60 AIN0 P77
SCK1
12
11
10
94
COM15
Page 6
TMP86CS25AFG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(3/4)
Pin Name P76 SO1 COM14 P75 SI1 COM13 P74 MUL3 COM12 P73 MUL2 COM11 P72 MUL1 COM10 P71 MUL0 COM9 P70 COM8 SEG39 SEG38 SEG37 SEG36 SEG35 SEG34 SEG33 SEG32 SEG31 SEG30 SEG29 SEG28 SEG27 SEG26 SEG25 SEG24 SEG23 SEG22 SEG21 SEG20 SEG19 SEG18 Pin Number Input/Output IO O O IO I O IO IO O IO IO O IO IO O IO O O IO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O PORT76 Serial Data Output 1 LCD common output 14 PORT75 Serial Data Input 1 LCD common output 13 PORT74 Multi Function 3 pin LCD common output 12 PORT73 Multi Function 2 pin LCD common output 11 PORT72 Multi Function 1 pin LCD common output 10 PORT71 Multi Function 0 pin LCD common output 9 PORT70 LCD common output 8 LCD segment output 39 LCD segment output 38 LCD segment output 37 LCD segment output 36 LCD segment output 35 LCD segment output 34 LCD segment output 33 LCD segment output 32 LCD segment output 31 LCD segment output 30 LCD segment output 29 LCD segment output 28 LCD segment output 27 LCD segment output 26 LCD segment output 25 LCD segment output 24 LCD segment output 23 LCD segment output 22 LCD segment output 21 LCD segment output 20 LCD segment output 19 LCD segment output 18 Functions
93
92
91
90
89
88
87 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Page 7
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86CS25AFG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(4/4)
Pin Name SEG17 SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 COM4 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 V4 V3 V2 V1 C1 C0 XIN XOUT
RESET
Pin Number 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 83 82 81 80 79 95 96 97 98 99 100 2 3 8 4 18 5 1
Input/Output O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I I I I I I I O I I I I I LCD segment output 17 LCD segment output 16 LCD segment output 15 LCD segment output 14 LCD segment output 13 LCD segment output 12 LCD segment output 11 LCD segment output 10 LCD segment output 9 LCD segment output 8 LCD segment output 7 LCD segment output 6 LCD segment output 5 LCD segment output 4 LCD segment output 3 LCD segment output 2 LCD segment output 1 LCD segment output 0 LCD common output 4 LCD common output 3 LCD common output 2 LCD common output 1 LCD common output 0 LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin
Functions
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Reset signal Test pin for out-going test. Normally, be fixed to low. Analog reference voltage input (High) Power Supply 0(GND)
TEST VAREF VDD VSS
Page 8
TMP86CS25AFG
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions
The CPU core consists of a CPU, a system clock controller, and an interrupt controller. This section provides a description of the CPU core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The TMP86CS25AFG memory is composed MaskROM, RAM, DBR(Data buffer register) and SFR(Special function register). They are all mapped in 64-Kbyte address space. Figure 2-1 shows the memory address map.
TMP86CS25AFG
0000H
SFR
003FH 0040H
64 bytes
SFR:
RAM
083FH 0F00H
2048 bytes
RAM:
Special function register includes: I/O ports Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers System control registers Program status word Random access memory includes: Data memory Stack
DBR:
DBR
0FFFH 1000H
256 bytes
MaskROM:
Data buffer register includes: Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers LCD display memory Program memory
MaskROM
FFC0H FFDFH FFE0H FFFFH
61440 bytes
Vector table for vector call instructions (32 bytes) Vector table for interrupts (32 bytes)
Figure 2-1 Memory Address Map 2.1.2 Program Memory (MaskROM)
The TMP86CS25AFG has a 61440 bytes (Address 1000H to FFFFH) of program memory (MaskROM ).
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP86CS25AFG has 2048 bytes (Address 0040H to 083FH) of internal RAM. The first 192 bytes (0040H to 00FFH) of the internal RAM are located in the direct area; instructions with shorten operations are available against such an area. The data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory should be initialized by an initialization routine. Page 9
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
Example :Clears RAM to "00H". (TMP86CS25AFG)
LD LD LD SRAMCLR: LD INC DEC JRS HL, 0040H A, H BC, 07FFH (HL), A HL BC F, SRAMCLR ; Start address setup ; Initial value (00H) setup
2.2 System Clock Controller
The system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller.
Timing generator control register Clock generator
XIN fc TBTCR 0036H
High-frequency clock oscillator
XOUT XTIN
Timing generator
fs
Standby controller
0038H SYSCR1 0039H SYSCR2
Low-frequency clock oscillator
XTOUT
System clocks Clock generator control
System control registers
Figure 2-2 System Colck Control 2.2.1 Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the basic clock which provides the system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware. It contains two oscillation circuits: One for the high-frequency clock and one for the low-frequency clock. Power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power operation based on the low-frequency clock. The high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator between the XIN/XOUT and XTIN/XTOUT pins respectively. Clock input from an external oscillator is also possible. In this case, external clock is applied to XIN/XTIN pin with XOUT/XTOUT pin not connected.
Page 10
TMP86CS25AFG
High-frequency clock XIN XOUT XIN XOUT (Open) XTIN
Low-frequency clock XTOUT XTIN XTOUT (Open)
(a) Crystal/Ceramic resonator
(b) External oscillator
(c) Crystal
(d) External oscillator
Figure 2-3 Examples of Resonator Connection
Note:The function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with disabling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program. The system to require the adjustment of the oscillation frequency should create the program for the adjustment in advance.
Page 11
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
2.2.2
Timing Generator
The timing generator generates the various system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware from the basic clock (fc or fs). The timing generator provides the following functions. 1. Generation of main system clock 2. Generation of divider output (DVO) pulses 3. Generation of source clocks for time base timer 4. Generation of source clocks for watchdog timer 5. Generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters 6. Generation of warm-up clocks for releasing STOP mode 7. LCD
2.2.2.1
Configuration of timing generator
The timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator, and machine cycle counters. An input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, SYSCR2 and TBTCR, that is shown in Figure 2-4. As reset and STOP mode started/canceled, the prescaler and the divider are cleared to "0".
fc or fs
Main system clock generator
SYSCK DV7CK
Machine cycle counters
High-frequency clock fc Low-frequency clock fs
12
fc/4
S A 123456 B Y
Divider
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 S B0 B1 A0 Y0 A1 Y1
Multiplexer
Multiplexer
Warm-up controller
Watchdog timer
Timer counter, Serial interface, Time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (Peripheral functions)
Figure 2-4 Configuration of Timing Generator
Page 12
TMP86CS25AFG
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR (0036H) 7 (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 DV7CK 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DV7CK
Selection of input to the 7th stage of the divider
0: fc/28 [Hz] 1: fs
R/W
Note 1: In single clock mode, do not set DV7CK to "1". Note 2: Do not set "1" on DV7CK while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 4: In SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the DV7CK setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider. Note 5: When STOP mode is entered from NORMAL1/2 mode, the DV7CK setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after release of STOP mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period.
2.2.2.2
Machine cycle
Instruction execution and peripheral hardware operation are synchronized with the main system clock. The minimum instruction execution unit is called an "machine cycle". There are a total of 10 different types of instructions for the TLCS-870/C Series: Ranging from 1-cycle instructions which require one machine cycle for execution to 10-cycle instructions which require 10 machine cycles for execution. A machine cycle consists of 4 states (S0 to S3), and each state consists of one main system clock.
1/fc or 1/fs [s]
Main system clock
State
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycle 2.2.3 Operation Mode Control Circuit
The operation mode control circuit starts and stops the oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. There are three operating modes: Single clock mode, dual clock mode and STOP mode. These modes are controlled by the system control registers (SYSCR1 and SYSCR2). Figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram.
2.2.3.1
Single-clock mode
Only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequency clock is used, and P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins are used as input/output ports. The main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. In the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s]. (1) NORMAL1 mode In this mode, both the CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock. The TMP86CS25AFG is placed in this mode after reset.
Page 13
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
(2)
IDLE1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock). IDLE1 mode is started by SYSCR2 = "1", and IDLE1 mode is released to NORMAL1 mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peripherals or external interrupt inputs. When the IMF (Interrupt master enable flag) is "1" (Interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance of the interrupt, and the operation will return to normal after the interrupt service is completed. When the IMF is "0" (Interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the IDLE1 mode start instruction.
(3)
IDLE0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by SYSCR2 = "1". When IDLE0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from IDLE0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering NORMAL1 mode back again. IDLE0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When IDLE0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to NORMAL1 mode.
2.2.3.2
Dual-clock mode
Both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillation circuits are used in this mode. P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. The main system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock in NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in SLOW and SLEEP modes. The machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and 4/fs [s] (122 s at fs = 32.768 kHz) in the SLOW and SLEEP modes. The TLCS-870/C is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. To use the dual-clock mode, the lowfrequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program. (1) NORMAL2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the high-frequency clock. On-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock. (2) SLOW2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the low-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. As the SYSCR2 becomes "1", the hardware changes into SLOW2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into NORMAL2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into SLOW1 mode. Do not clear SYSCR2 to "0" during SLOW2 mode. (3) SLOW1 mode This mode can be used to reduce power-consumption by turning off oscillation of the high-frequency clock. The CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the low-frequency clock.
Page 14
TMP86CS25AFG
Switching back and forth between SLOW1 and SLOW2 modes are performed by SYSCR2. In SLOW1 and SLEEP modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (4) IDLE2 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock and/or the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of IDLE2 mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to NORMAL2 mode. (5) SLEEP1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. The CPU, the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of SLEEP mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to SLOW1 mode. In SLOW1 and SLEEP1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (6) SLEEP2 mode The SLEEP2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the SLOW2 mode. The status under the SLEEP2 mode is same as that under the SLEEP1 mode, except for the oscillation circuit of the highfrequency clock. (7) SLEEP0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by setting "1" on bit SYSCR2. When SLEEP0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from SLEEP0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering SLOW1 mode back again. SLEEP0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When SLEEP0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to SLOW1 mode.
2.2.3.3
STOP mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. The internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during STOP mode. STOP mode is started by the system control register 1 (SYSCR1), and STOP mode is released by a inputting (Either level-sensitive or edge-sensitive can be programmably selected) to the STOP pin. After the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the STOP mode start instruction.
Page 15
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
IDLE0 mode
Reset release
RESET
IDLE1 mode (a) Single-clock mode
Note 2 SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" NORMAL1 mode Interrupt STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "0" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" STOP SYSCR2 = "1" SLOW2 mode Interrupt SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "0" SLOW1 mode SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" SLEEP0 mode
IDLE2 mode
Interrupt
NORMAL2 mode
SYSCR2 = "0" SLEEP2 mode
SLEEP1 mode (b) Dual-clock mode
SYSCR2 = "1" Interrupt Note 2
Note 1: NORMAL1 and NORMAL2 modes are generically called NORMAL; SLOW1 and SLOW2 are called SLOW; IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 are called IDLE; SLEEP0, SLEEP1 and SLEEP2 are called SLEEP. Note 2: The mode is released by falling edge of TBTCR setting.
Figure 2-6 Operating Mode Transition Diagram
Table 2-1 Operating Mode and Conditions
Oscillator Operating Mode High Frequency Low Frequency CPU Core TBT Other Peripherals Reset Operate 4/fc [s] Machine Cycle Time
RESET NORMAL1 Single clock IDLE1 IDLE0 STOP NORMAL2 IDLE2 SLOW2 Dual clock SLEEP2 SLOW1 SLEEP1 SLEEP0 STOP Stop Stop Oscillation Stop Oscillation
Reset Operate Stop Halt
Reset
Operate
Halt Operate with high frequency
Halt
-
4/fc [s]
Oscillation
Halt Operate with low frequency Halt Operate with low frequency Operate
Operate
4/fs [s]
Halt Halt
Halt
-
Page 16
TMP86CS25AFG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1 (0038H) 7 STOP 6 RELM 5 RETM 4 OUTEN 3 WUT 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 00**)
STOP RELM RETM OUTEN
STOP mode start Release method for STOP mode Operating mode after STOP mode Port output during STOP mode
0: CPU core and peripherals remain active 1: CPU core and peripherals are halted (Start STOP mode) 0: Edge-sensitive release 1: Level-sensitive release 0: Return to NORMAL1/2 mode 1: Return to SLOW1 mode 0: High impedance 1: Output kept Return to NORMAL mode Return to SLOW mode 3 x 213/fs 213/fs 3 x 26/fs 26/fs
R/W R/W R/W R/W
WUT
Warm-up time at releasing STOP mode
00 01 10 11
3 x 216/fc 216/fc 3 x 214/fc 214/fc
R/W
Note 1: Always set RETM to "0" when transiting from NORMAL mode to STOP mode. Always set RETM to "1" when transiting from SLOW mode to STOP mode. Note 2: When STOP mode is released with RESET pin input, a return is made to NORMAL1 regardless of the RETM contents. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care Note 4: Bits 1 and 0 in SYSCR1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed. Note 5: As the hardware becomes STOP mode under OUTEN = "0", input value is fixed to "0"; therefore it may cause external interrupt request on account of falling edge. Note 6: When the key-on wakeup is used, RELM should be set to "1". Note 7: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode. Note 8: The warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator.
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2 (0039H) 7 XEN 6 XTEN 5 SYSCK 4 IDLE 3 2
TGHALT
1
0 (Initial value: 1000 *0**)
XEN XTEN
High-frequency oscillator control Low-frequency oscillator control Main system clock select (Write)/main system clock monitor (Read) CPU and watchdog timer control (IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) TG control (IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes)
0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL1/NORMAL2/IDLE1/IDLE2) 1: Low-frequency clock (SLOW1/SLOW2/SLEEP1/SLEEP2) 0: CPU and watchdog timer remain active 1: CPU and watchdog timer are stopped (Start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) 0: Feeding clock to all peripherals from TG 1: Stop feeding clock to peripherals except TBT from TG. (Start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes) R/W R/W
SYSCK
IDLE
TGHALT
Note 1: A reset is applied if both XEN and XTEN are cleared to "0", XEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "0", or XTEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "1". Note 2: *: Don't care, TG: Timing generator, *; Don't care Note 3: Bits 3, 1 and 0 in SYSCR2 are always read as undefined value. Note 4: Do not set IDLE and TGHALT to "1" simultaneously. Note 5: Because returning from IDLE0/SLEEP0 to NORMAL1/SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 6: When IDLE1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode is released, IDLE is automatically cleared to "0". Note 7: When IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released, TGHALT is automatically cleared to "0". Note 8: Before setting TGHALT to "1", be sure to stop peripherals. If peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of peripherals may be set after IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released.
Page 17
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control
STOP mode
STOP mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the STOP pin input and key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) which is controlled by the STOP mode release control register (STOPCR). The STOP pin is also used both as a port P20 and an INT5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. STOP mode is started by setting SYSCR1 to "1". During STOP mode, the following status is maintained. 1. Oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted. 2. The data memory, registers, the program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before STOP mode was entered. 3. The prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". 4. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction (e.g., [SET (SYSCR1).7]) which started STOP mode. STOP mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be selected with the SYSCR1. Do not use any key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive mode.
2.2.4.1
Note 1: The STOP mode can be released by either the STOP or key-on wakeup pin (STOP5 to STOP2). However, because the STOP pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release input, the STOP pin must be used for releasing STOP mode. Note 2: During STOP period (from start of STOP mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to "1" and interrupts may be accepted immediately after STOP mode is released. Before starting STOP mode, therefore, disable interrupts. Also, before enabling interrupts after STOP mode is released, clear unnecessary interrupt latches.
(1)
Level-sensitive release mode (RELM = "1") In this mode, STOP mode is released by setting the STOP pin high or setting the STOP5 to STOP2 pin input which is enabled by STOPCR. This mode is used for capacitor backup when the main power supply is cut off and long term battery backup. Even if an instruction for starting STOP mode is executed while STOP pin input is high or STOP5
to STOP2 input is low, STOP mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immediately. Thus, to start STOP mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to first confirm that the STOP pin input is low or STOP5 to STOP2 input is high. The following two methods can be used for confirmation. 1. Testing a port. 2. Using an external interrupt input INT5 (INT5 is a falling edge-sensitive input). Example 1 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing a port P20.
LD SSTOPH: TEST JRS DI SET (SYSCR1). 7 (SYSCR1), 01010000B (P2PRD). 0 F, SSTOPH ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode ; Wait until the STOP pin input goes low level
Page 18
TMP86CS25AFG
Example 2 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode with an INT5 interrupt.
PINT5: TEST JRS LD DI SET SINT5: RETI (SYSCR1). 7 (P2PRD). 0 F, SINT5 (SYSCR1), 01010000B ; To reject noise, STOP mode does not start if port P20 is at high ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode. ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode
STOP pin XOUT pin NORMAL operation STOP operation Confirm by program that the STOP pin input is low and start STOP mode.
VIH
Warm up
NORMAL operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware. Always released if the STOP pin input is high.
Figure 2-7 Level-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: Even if the STOP pin input is low after warm-up start, the STOP mode is not restarted. Note 2: In this case of changing to the level-sensitive mode from the edge-sensitive mode, the release mode is not switched until a rising edge of the STOP pin input is detected.
(2)
Edge-sensitive release mode (RELM = "0") In this mode, STOP mode is released by a rising edge of the STOP pin input. This is used in applications where a relatively short program is executed repeatedly at periodic intervals. This periodic signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the STOP pin. In the edge-sensitive release mode, STOP mode is started even when the STOP pin input is high level. Do not use any STOP5 to STOP2 pin input for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive release mode.
Example :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode
DI LD (SYSCR1), 10010000B ; IMF 0 ; Starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode
STOP pin XOUT pin
NORMAL operation STOP mode started by the program. STOP operation
VIH
Warm up NORMAL operation
STOP operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware at the rising edge of STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Edge-sensitive Release Mode
Page 19
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
STOP mode is released by the following sequence. 1. In the dual-clock mode, when returning to NORMAL2, both the high-frequency and lowfrequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to SLOW1 mode, only the lowfrequency clock oscillator is turned on. In the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency clock oscillator is turned on. 2. A warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. During warm up, all internal operations remain halted. Four different warm-up times can be selected with the SYSCR1 in accordance with the resonator characteristics. 3. When the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction.
Note 1: When the STOP mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". Note 2: STOP mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin, which immediately performs the normal reset operation. Note 3: When STOP mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed. The power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing STOP mode. The RESET pin input must also be "H" level, rising together with the power supply voltage. In this case, if an external time constant circuit has been connected, the RESET pin input voltage will increase at a slower pace than the power supply voltage. At this time, there is a danger that a reset may occur if input voltage level of the RESET pin drops below the non-inverting high-level input voltage (Hysteresis input).
Table 2-2 Warm-up Time Example (at fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Warm-up Time [ms] WUT Return to NORMAL Mode 00 01 10 11 12.288 4.096 3.072 1.024 Return to SLOW Mode 750 250 5.85 1.95
Note 1: The warm-up time is obtained by dividing the basic clock by the divider. Therefore, the warm-up time may include a certain amount of error if there is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency when STOP mode is released. Thus, the warm-up time must be considered as an approximate value.
Page 20
Turn off
Oscillator circuit
Turn on
Main system clock a+3 SET (SYSCR1). 7 n+1 (a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a) n+2 n+3 n+4 Halt
Program counter
a+2
Instruction execution
Divider
n
0
Figure 2-9 STOP Mode Start/Release
a+4
Instruction address a + 2
Page 21
0 1 (b) STOP mode release
Warm up
STOP pin input
Oscillator circuit
Turn off
Turn on
Main system clock a+5
Instruction address a + 3
Program counter
a+3
a+6
Instruction address a + 4
Instruction execution
Halt
Divider
0
Count up
2
3
TMP86CS25AFG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
2.2.4.2
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and maskable interrupts. The following status is maintained during these modes. 1. Operation of the CPU and watchdog timer (WDT) is halted. On-chip peripherals continue to operate. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before these modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts these modes.
Starting IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Yes Reset input No No Interrupt request Yes "0" IMF
Reset
Normal release mode
"1" (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction
Figure 2-10 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes
Page 22
TMP86CS25AFG
* Start the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes After IMF is set to "0", set the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) which releases IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. To start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master enable flag (IMF). After releasing IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode. (1) Normal release mode (IMF = "0") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual interrupt enable flag (EF). After the interrupt is generated, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction. Normally, the interrupt latches (IL) of the interrupt source used for releasing must be cleared to "0" by load instructions. (2) Interrupt release mode (IMF = "1") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) and the interrupt processing is started. After the interrupt is processed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes.
Note: When a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes will not be started.
Page 23
Main system clock
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Interrupt request a+2 SET (SYSCR2). 4 Operate Halt a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
Watchdog timer
(a) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a)
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+3 Instruction address a + 2 Operate Normal release mode a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-11 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes Start/Release
Page 24
a+3 Acceptance of interrupt Operate Operate Interrupt release mode
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
Interrupt request
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
TMP86CS25AFG
(b) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes release
TMP86CS25AFG
2.2.4.3
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and the time base timer control register (TBTCR). The following status is maintained during IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. 1. Timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except TBT. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes.
Note: Before starting IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, be sure to stop (Disable) peripherals.
Stopping peripherals by instruction
Starting IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Reset input No No TBT source clock falling edge Yes TBTCR = "1" Yes TBT interrupt enable Yes No IMF = "1"
Yes
Reset
No
No
(Normal release mode)
Yes (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes start instruction
Figure 2-12 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes
Page 25
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
* Start the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes Stop (Disable) peripherals such as a timer counter. To start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master flag (IMF), the individual interrupt enable flag of TBT and TBTCR. After releasing IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1". IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start/release without reference to TBTCR setting.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF*EF6*TBTCR = "0") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR. After the falling edge is detected, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start instruction. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1".
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF*EF6*TBTCR = "1") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR and INTTBT interrupt processing is started.
Note 1: Because returning from IDLE0, SLEEP0 to NORMAL1, SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0, SLEEP0 mode might be the shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 2: When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated immediately before IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode is started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode will not be started.
Page 26
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+2 a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 2
Halt
Watchdog timer
Operate
(a) IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a
Main system clock
TBT clock a+3 a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-13 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes Start/Release
Page 27
Instruction address a + 2 Operate
Normal release mode a+3
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
TBT clock
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Acceptance of interrupt Operate
Interrupt release mode
(b) IDLE and SLEEP0 modes release
TMP86CS25AFG
Watchdog timer
Halt
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS25AFG
2.2.4.4
SLOW mode
SLOW mode is controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2). The following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter. (1) Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode First, set SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2 mode. Next, clear SYSCR2 to turn off high-frequency oscillation.
Note: The high-frequency clock can be continued oscillation in order to return to NORMAL2 mode from SLOW mode quickly. Always turn off oscillation of high-frequency clock when switching from SLOW mode to stop mode.
Example 1 :Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode.
SET (SYSCR2). 5 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
Example 2 :Switching to the SLOW1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized.
SET LD LD LDW DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRH). 3 (SYSCR2). 6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H ; SYSCR2 1 ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fs for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time (Depend on oscillator accompanied) ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 28
TMP86CS25AFG
(2)
Switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode First, set SYSCR2 to turn on the high-frequency oscillation. When time for stabilization (Warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (TC4,TC3), clear SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the high-frequency clock. SLOW mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: After SYSCK is cleared to "0", executing the instructions is continiued by the low-frequency clock for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks.
High-frequency clock Low-frequency clock Main system clock SYSCK
Example :Switching from the SLOW1 mode to the NORMAL2 mode (fc = 16 MHz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms).
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 0 (Switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRH). 3 (SYSCR2). 7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG4), 0F8H ; SYSCR2 1 (Starts high-frequency oscillation) ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fc for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 29
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock Turn off
SYSCK
XEN CLR (SYSCR2). 7 SLOW2 mode (a) Switching to the SLOW mode
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 5
NORMAL2 mode
SLOW1 mode
Figure 2-14 Switching between the NORMAL2 and SLOW Modes
Page 30
CLR (SYSCR2). 5 Warm up during SLOW2 mode (b) Switching to the NORMAL2 mode
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock
SYSCK
XEN
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 7
TMP86CS25AFG
SLOW1 mode
NORMAL2 mode
TMP86CS25AFG
2.3 Reset Circuit
The TMP86CS25AFG has four types of reset generation procedures: An external reset input, an address trap reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system clock reset. Of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the system clock reset are a malfunction reset. When the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the maximum 24/fc[s]. The malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initialized when power is turned on. Therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz) when power is turned on. Table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action. Table 2-3 Initializing Internal Status by Reset Action
On-chip Hardware Program counter Stack pointer General-purpose registers (W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX, IY) Jump status flag Zero flag Carry flag Half carry flag Sign flag Overflow flag Interrupt master enable flag Interrupt individual enable flags Interrupt latches (JF) (ZF) (CF) (HF) (SF) (VF) (IMF) (EF) (IL) (PC) (SP) Initial Value (FFFEH) Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Output latches of I/O ports Not initialized Not initialized 0 0 Control registers 0 LCD data buffer RAM Refer to each of control register Not initialized Not initialized Refer to I/O port circuitry Watchdog timer Enable Prescaler and divider of timing generator 0 On-chip Hardware Initial Value
2.3.1
External Reset Input
The RESET pin contains a Schmitt trigger (Hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor. When the RESET pin is held at "L" level for at least 3 machine cycles (12/fc [s]) with the power supply voltage within the operating voltage range and oscillation stable, a reset is applied and the internal state is initialized. When the RESET pin input goes high, the reset operation is released and the program execution starts at the vector address stored at addresses FFFEH to FFFFH.
VDD
RESET
Internal reset Watchdog timer reset Malfunction reset output circuit Address trap reset System clock reset
Figure 2-15 Reset Circuit
Page 31
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86CS25AFG
2.3.2
Address trap reset
If the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (when WDTCR1 is set to "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. The reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz).
Note:The operating mode under address trapped is alternative of reset or interrupt. The address trap area is alternative.
Instruction execution Internal reset
JP a Address trap is occurred
Reset release
Instruction at address r
maximum 24/fc [s]
4/fc to 12/fc [s]
16/fc [s]
Note 1: Address "a" is in the SFR, DBR or on-chip RAM (WDTCR1 = "1") space. Note 2: During reset release, reset vector "r" is read out, and an instruction at address "r" is fetched and decoded.
Figure 2-16 Address Trap Reset 2.3.3 Watchdog timer reset
Refer to Section "Watchdog Timer".
2.3.4
System clock reset
If the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the CPU. (The oscillation is continued without stopping.) - In case of clearing SYSCR2 and SYSCR2 simultaneously to "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "1". The reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 s at 16.0 MHz).
Page 32
TMP86CS25AFG
Page 33
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86CS25AFG
Page 34
TMP86CS25AFG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP86CS25AFG has a total of 20 interrupt sources excluding reset, of which 4 source levels are multiplexed. Interrupts can be nested with priorities. Four of the internal interrupt sources are non-maskable while the rest are maskable. Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. The interrupt latch is set to "1" by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Latch - - - IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 Vector Address FFFE FFFC FFFC FFFA FFF8 FFF6 FFF4 FFF2 FFF0 FFEE FFEC
Interrupt Factors Internal/External Internal Internal Internal Internal External External Internal External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External Internal External Internal (Reset) INTSWI (Software interrupt) INTUNDEF (Executed the undefined instruction interrupt) INTATRAP (Address trap interrupt) INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt)
INT0
Enable Condition Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable IMF* EF4 = 1, INT0EN = 1 IMF* EF5 = 1 IMF* EF6 = 1 IMF* EF7 = 1 IMF* EF8 = 1 IMF* EF9 = 1, IL9ER = 0 IMF* EF9 = 1, IL9ER = 1 IMF* EF10 = 1, IL10ER = 0 IMF* EF10 = 1, IL10ER = 1 IMF* EF11 = 1 IMF* EF12 = 1 IMF* EF13 = 1 IMF* EF14 = 1, IL14ER = 0 IMF* EF14 = 1, IL14ER = 1 IMF* EF15 = 1, IL15ER = 0 IMF* EF15 = 1, IL15ER = 1
Priority 1 2 2 2 2 5 6 7 8 9 10
INT1 INTTBT INT2 INTTC1 INTRXD INTSIO0 INTTXD INTSIO1 INTTC4 INTTC6 INTADC INT3 INTTC3
INT5
IL10
FFEA
11
IL11 IL12 IL13 IL14
FFE8 FFE6 FFE4 FFE2
12 13 14 15
IL15
FFE0
16
INTTC5
Note 1: The INTSEL register is used to select the interrupt source to be enabled for each multiplexed source level (see 3.3 Interrupt Source Selector (INTSEL)). Note 2: To use the address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "reset request" after reset is cancelled). For details, see "Address Trap". Note 3: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after reset is released). For details, see "Watchdog Timer".
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL15 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to "1", and the CPU is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to "0" during reset. The interrupt latches are located on address 003CH and 003DH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 and IL3 should be set to "1". If the read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed. Page 35
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86CS25AFG
Interrupt latches are not set to "1" by an instruction. Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
DI LDW EI (ILL), 1110100000111111B ; IMF 0 ; IL12, IL10 to IL6 0 ; IMF 1
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latchess
LD WA, (ILL) ; W ILH, A ILL
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
TEST JR (ILL). 7 F, SSET ; if IL7 = 1 then jump
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the non-maskable interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Nonmaskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR. The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These registers are located on address 003AH and 003BH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an instructions (Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. While IMF = "0", all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to "1", the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to "0" after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled. By executing return interrupt instruction [RETI/RETN], the stacked data, which was the status before interrupt acceptance, is loaded on IMF again. The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction. The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to "0".
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF15 to EF4)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to "1" enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to "0" disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF15 to EF4) are initialized to "0" and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to "1".
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute nor-
Page 36
TMP86CS25AFG
mally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
DI LDW : : EI ; IMF 1 (EIRL), 1110100010100000B ; IMF 0 ; EF15 to EF13, EF11, EF7, EF5 1 Note: IMF should not be set.
Example 2 :C compiler description example
unsigned int _io (3AH) EIRL; _DI(); EIRL = 10100000B; : _EI(); /* 3AH shows EIRL address */
Page 37
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86CS25AFG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: 00000000 000000**) ILH,ILL (003DH, 003CH) 15 IL15 14 IL14 13 IL13 12 IL12 11 IL11 10 IL10 9 IL9 8 IL8 7 IL7 6 IL6 5 IL5 4 IL4 3 IL3 2 IL2 1 0
ILH (003DH)
ILL (003CH)
IL15 to IL2
Interrupt latches
at RD 0: No interrupt request 1: Interrupt request
at WR 0: Clears the interrupt request 1: (Interrupt latch is not set.)
R/W
Note 1: To clear any one of bits IL7 to IL4, be sure to write "1" into IL2 and IL3. Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1". Note 3: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: 00000000 0000***0) EIRH,EIRL (003BH, 003AH) 15 EF15 14 EF14 13 EF13 12 EF12 11 EF11 10 EF10 9 EF9 8 EF8 7 EF7 6 EF6 5 EF5 4 EF4 EIRL (003AH) 3 2 1 0 IMF
EIRH (003BH)
EF15 to EF4 IMF
Individual-interrupt enable flag (Specified for each bit) Interrupt master enable flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: *: Don't care Note 2: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF15 to EF4) to "1" at the same time. Note 3: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 38
TMP86CS25AFG
3.3 Interrupt Source Selector (INTSEL)
Each interrupt source that shares the interrupt source level with another interrupt source is allowed to enable the interrupt latch only when it is selected in the INTSEL register. The interrupt controller does not hold interrupt requests corresponding to interrupt sources that are not selected in the INTSEL register. Therefore, the INTSEL register must be set appropriately before interrupt requests are generated. The following interrupt sources share their interrupt source level; the source is selected onnthe register INTSEL. 1. INTRXD and INTSIO0 share the interrupt source level whose priority is 10. 2. INTTXD and INTSIO1 share the interrupt source level whose priority is 11. 3. INT3 and INTTC3 share the interrupt source level whose priority is 15. 4. INT5 and INTTC5 share the interrupt source level whose priority is 16. Interrupt source selector
INTSEL (003EH) 7 6 IL9ER 5 IL10ER 4 3 2 1 IL14ER 0 IL15ER (Initial value: *00* **00)
IL9ER IL10ER IL14ER IL15ER
Selects INTRXD or INTSIO0 Selects INTTXD or INTSIO1 Selects INT3 or INTTC3 Selects INT5 or INTTC5
0: INTRXD 1: INTSIO0 0: INTTXD 1: INTSIO1 0: INT3 1: INTTC3 0: INT5 1: INTTC5
R/W R/W R/W R/W
3.4 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to "0" by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 s @16 MHz) after the completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.4.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to "0" in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt. b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to "0". c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSW + IMF, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 3. d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter. e. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
Page 39
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Interrupt Sequence TMP86CS25AFG
1-machine cycle
Interrupt service task
Interrupt request Interrupt latch (IL)
IMF Execute instruction a-1 Execute instruction Execute instruction
Interrupt acceptance
Execute RETI instruction
PC
a
a+1
a
b
b+1 b+2 b + 3
c+1
c+2
a
a+1 a+2
SP
n
n-1 n-2
n-3
n-2 n-1
n
Note 1: a: Return address entry address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt service program
Vector table address
Entry address Interrupt service program
FFF2H FFF3H
03H D2H
Vector
D203H D204H
0FH 06H
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to "1" even if the maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to "1" in the interrupt service program. In this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags. To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting IMF to "1". As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested.
3.4.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. The following methods are used to save/restore the generalpurpose registers.
Page 40
TMP86CS25AFG
3.4.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx: PUSH WA ; Save WA register (interrupt processing) POP RETI WA ; Restore WA register ; RETURN
Address (Example) SP A SP PCL PCH PSW At acceptance of an interrupt W PCL PCH PSW At execution of PUSH instruction SP PCL PCH PSW At execution of POP instruction SP b-5 b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b At execution of RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.4.2.2 Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx: LD (GSAVA), A ; Save A register (interrupt processing) LD RETI A, (GSAVA) ; Restore A register ; RETURN
Page 41
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Interrupt Sequence TMP86CS25AFG
Main task Interrupt acceptance Interrupt service task Saving registers
Restoring registers Interrupt return Saving/Restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing 3.4.3 Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI]/[RETN] Interrupt Return 1. Program counter (PC) and program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are restored from the stack. 2. Stack pointer (SP) is incremented by 3.
As for address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), it is required to alter stacked data for program counter (PC) to restarting address, during interrupt service program.
Note:If [RETN] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and INTATRAP occurs again.When interrupt acceptance processing has completed, stacked data for PCL and PCH are located on address (SP + 1) and (SP + 2) respectively.
Example 1 :Returning from address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) service program
PINTxx: POP LD PUSH WA WA, Return Address WA ; Recover SP by 2 ; ; Alter stacked data
(interrupt processing) RETN ; RETURN
Example 2 :Restarting without returning interrupt (In this case, PSW (Includes IMF) before interrupt acceptance is discarded.)
PINTxx: INC INC INC SP SP SP ; Recover SP by 3 ; ;
(interrupt processing) LD JP EIRL, data Restart Address ; Set IMF to "1" or clear it to "0" ; Jump into restarting address
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Page 42
TMP86CS25AFG
Note 1: It is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before INTATRAP (Increment 3 times), if return interrupt instruction [RETN] is not utilized during interrupt service program under INTATRAP (such as Example 2). Note 2: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task.
3.5 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW is highest prioritized interrupt). Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.5.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.5.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting address.
3.6 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF)
Taking code which is not defined as authorized instruction for instruction causes INTUNDEF. INTUNDEF is generated when the CPU fetches such a code and tries to execute it. INTUNDEF is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTUNDEF interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The undefined instruction interrupt (INTUNDEF) forces CPU to jump into vector address, as software interrupt (SWI) does.
3.7 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
Fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructions (Address trapped area) causes reset output or address trap interrupt (INTATRAP). INTATRAP is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTATRAP interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on watchdog timer control register (WDTCR).
3.8 External Interrupts
The TMP86CS25AFG has 5 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise). Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT3. The INT0/P63 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. Edge selection, noise reject control and INT0/P63 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (EINTCR).
Page 43
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.8 External Interrupts TMP86CS25AFG
Source
Pin
Enable Conditions
Release Edge
Digital Noise Reject Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
INT0
INT0
IMF
EF4
INT0EN=1
Falling edge
INT1
INT1
IMF
EF5 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT2
INT2
IMF
EF7 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT3
INT3
IMF and
EF14 = 1
IL14ER=0
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT5
INT5
IMF EF15 = 1 and IL15ER=0
Falling edge
Note 1: In NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. Note 2: When INT0EN = "0", IL4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input. Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 44
TMP86CS25AFG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR (0037H) 7 INT1NC 6 INT0EN 5 4 3 INT3ES 2 INT2ES 1 INT1ES 0 (Initial value: 00** 000*)
INT1NC INT0EN INT3 ES INT2 ES INT1 ES
Noise reject time select P63/INT0 pin configuration INT3 edge select INT2 edge select INT1 edge select
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 0: P63 input/output port 1: INT0 pin (Port P63 should be set to an input mode) 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: When the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register (EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR). Note 3: The maximum time from modifying INT1NC until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc.
Page 45
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.8 External Interrupts TMP86CS25AFG
Page 46
TMP86CS25AFG
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
The TMP86CS25AFG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 0F00H to 0FFFH. This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for TMP86CS25AFG.
4.1 SFR
Address 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H 000AH 000BH 000CH 000DH 000EH 000FH 0010H 0011H 0012H 0013H 0014H 0015H 0016H 0017H 0018H 0019H 001AH 001BH 001CH 001DH 001EH 001FH 0020H 0021H 0022H 0023H 0024H 0025H UARTSR ADCDR1 ADCDR2 Reserved Reserved Reserved UARTCR1 TC1SR Reserved TC3CR TC4CR TC5CR TC6CR TTREG3 TTREG4 TTREG5 TTREG6 P7PRD ADCCR1 ADCCR2 TREG1AL TREG1AM TREG1AH TREG1B TC1CR1 TC1CR2 P1PRD P2PRD P3PRD P5PRD P6CR Read Reserved P1DR P2DR P3DR P3LCR P5DR P6DR P7DR Write
Page 47
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 SFR TMP86CS25AFG
Address 0026H 0027H 0028H 0029H 002AH 002BH 002CH 002DH 002EH 002FH 0030H 0031H 0032H 0033H 0034H 0035H 0036H 0037H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH 003DH 003EH 003FH
Read LCDCTL1 LCDCTL2 P1LCR P5LCR P7LCR PWREG3 PWREG4 PWREG5 PWREG6 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TBTCR EINTCR SYSCR1 SYSCR2 EIRL EIRH ILL ILH INTSEL PSW
Write UARTCR2
WDTCR1 WDTCR2
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 48
TMP86CS25AFG
4.2 DBR
Address 0F80H 0F81H 0F82H 0F83H 0F84H 0F85H 0F86H 0F87H 0F88H 0F89H 0F8AH 0F8BH 0F8CH 0F8DH 0F8EH 0F8FH 0F90H 0F91H 0F92H 0F93H 0F94H 0F95H 0F96H 0F97H 0F98H 0F99H 0F9AH 0F9BH 0F9CH 0F9DH 0F9EH 0F9FH SIO0SR RDBUF Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Read Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SIO0BR0 SIO0BR1 SIO0BR2 SIO0BR3 SIO0BR4 SIO0BR5 SIO0BR6 SIO0BR7 SIO0CR1 SIO0CR2 STOPCR TDBUF Write
Page 49
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86CS25AFG
Address 0FA0H 0FA1H 0FA2H 0FA3H 0FA4H 0FA5H 0FA6H 0FA7H 0FA8H 0FA9H 0FAAH 0FABH 0FACH 0FADH 0FAEH 0FAFH 0FB0H 0FB1H 0FB2H 0FB3H 0FB4H 0FB5H 0FB6H 0FB7H 0FB8H 0FB9H 0FBAH 0FBBH 0FBCH 0FBDH 0FBEH 0FBFH
Read SIO1BR0 SIO1BR1 SIO1BR2 SIO1BR3 SIO1BR4 SIO1BR5 SIO1BR6 SIO1BR7 SIO1SR Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
SIO1CR1 SIO1CR2
Page 50
TMP86CS25AFG
Address 0FC0H 0FC1H 0FC2H 0FC3H 0FC4H 0FC5H 0FC6H 0FC7H 0FC8H 0FC9H 0FCAH 0FCBH 0FCCH 0FCDH 0FCEH 0FCFH 0FD0H 0FD1H 0FD2H 0FD3H 0FD4H 0FD5H 0FD6H 0FD7H 0FD8H 0FD9H 0FDAH 0FDBH 0FDCH 0FDDH 0FDEH 0FDFH
Read MULSEL Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
Address 0FE0H :: 0FFFH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.). Note 4: This product has a LCD display data buffer (assigned to address 0F00H to 0F7FH). For detail, refer to the chapter of LCD driver.
Page 51
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86CS25AFG
Page 52
TMP86CS25AFG
5. I/O Ports
The TMP86CS25AFG have 6 parallel input/output ports (42 pins) as follows.
Primary Function Port P1 Port P2 Port P3 Port P5 Port P6 Port P7 8-bit I/O port 3-bit I/O port 7-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port Secondary Functions External interrupt input, serial interface input/output, UART input/output and segment output. Low-frequency resonator connections, external interrupt input, STOP mode release signal input. Timer/Counter input/output and divider output and segment/common output. Segment output. Analog input, external interrupt input, timer/counter input and STOP mode release signal input. Common output. Timer/Counter input/output and divider output.
Each output port contains a latch, which holds the output data. All input ports do not have latches, so the external input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several timer before processing. Figure 5-1 shows input/output timing examples. External data is read from an I/O port in the S1 state of the read cycle during execution of the read instruction. This timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the program. Output data changes in the S2 state of the write cycle during execution of the instruction which writes to an I/O port.
Fetch cycle Fetch cycle Read cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 S1 S2 S3 Instruction execution cycle Ex: LD A, (x)
Input strobe
Data input (a) Input timing Fetch cycle Fetch cycle Write cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 S1 S2 S3 Instruction execution cycle Ex: LD (x), A
Output strobe
Data output
Old (b) Output timing
New
Note: The positions of the read and write cycles may vary, depending on the instruction.
Figure 5-1 Input/Output Timing (Example)
Page 53
5. I/O Ports
5.1 Port P1 (P17 to P10) TMP86CS25AFG
5.1 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
Port P1 is an 8-bit input/output port which is also used as an external interrupt input, serial interface input/output, UART input/output and segment output of LCD. When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P1LCR should be set to "1". When used as an input port or a secondary function (except for segment) pins, the respective output latch (P1DR) should be set to "1" and its corresponding P1LCR bit should be set to "0". When used as an output port, the respective P1LCR bit should be set to "0". During reset, the output latch is initialized to "1". P1 port output latch (P1DR) and P1 port terminal input (P1PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P1DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P1PRD register should be read. If the terminal input data which is configured as LCD segment output is read, unstable data is read.
Control input Terminal input (P1PRD) P1LCRi P1LCRi input Output latch data (P1DR) Data output (P1DR) Control output STOP OUTEN LCD data output D Q D Q P1i Note: i = 7 to 0 D Q
Output latch
Figure 5-2 Port 1
7 P1DR (0001H) R/W P17 SEG59
SCK0
6 P16 SEG58 TxD SO0 6
5 P15 SEG57 RxD SI0 5
4 P14 SEG56 MUL6 4
3 P13 SEG55 MUL5 3
2 P12 SEG54 MUL4 2
1 P11 SEG53
0 P10 SEG52
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
P1LCR (0029H)
7
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1LCR
Port P1/segment output select (set for each bit individually)
0: P1 input/output port or secondary function (expect for segment) 1: segment output
R/W
P1PRD (0008H) Read only
7 P17
6 P16
5 P15
4 P14
3 P13
2 P12
1 P11
0 P10
Note: With ports assigned as MUL6 to MUL0, assigned pins can be switched by the multi function register (MULSEL). The assigned functions are shown in "5.7 Multi Function Register".
Page 54
TMP86CS25AFG
5.2 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
Port P2 is a 3-bit input/output port. It is also used as an external interrupt, a STOP mode release signal input, and low-frequency crystal oscillator connection pins. When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (P2DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P2DR is initialized to "1". A low-frequency crystal oscillator (32.768 kHz) is connected to pins P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) in the dualclock mode. In the single-clock mode, pins P21 and P22 can be used as normal input/output ports. It is recommended that pin P20 should be used as an external interrupt input, a STOP mode release signal input, or an input port. If it is used as an output port, the interrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse. P2 port output latch (P2DR) and P2 port terminal input (P2PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P2DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P2PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P2, read data of bits 7 to 3 are unstable.
Data input (P20PRD) Data input (P20) Data output (P20) Control input Data input (P21PRD) Osc. enable Data input (P21) Data output (P21) Data input (P22PRD) Data input (P22) Data output (P22) D Q P22 (XTOUT) D Q P21 (XTIN) D Q P20 (INT5, STOP)
Output latch
Output latch
Output latch STOP OUTEN XTEN fs
Figure 5-3 Port 2
P2DR (0002H) R/W P2PRD (0009H) Read only
7
6
5
4
3
2 P22 XTOUT
1 P21 XTIN 1 P21
0 P20
INT5 STOP
(Initial value: **** *111)
7
6
5
4
3
2 P22
0 P20
Note: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode.
Page 55
5. I/O Ports
5.3 Port P3 (P36 to P30) TMP86CS25AFG
5.3 Port P3 (P36 to P30)
Port P3 is a 7-bit input/output port. It is also used as a External interrupt input, timer/counter input/output, divider output and LCD common/segment output. When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, after setting segment/common output control (P3LCR) to "0" respective output latch (P3DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P3DR is initialized to "1", and segment output control (P3LCR) is initialized by "0". In using it as LCD segment/ common output, it sets the bit to which P3LCR corresponds to "1". P3 port output latch (P3DR) and P3 port terminal input (P3PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P3DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P3PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P3, read data of bit 7 is unstable.
Control input Terminal input (P3PRD) P3LCRi P3LCRi input Output latch data (P3DR) Data output (P3DR) Control output STOP OUTEN LCD data output D Q P3i Note: i = 6 to 0 D Q
Output latch
Figure 5-4 Port 3
P3DR (0003H) R/W P3LCR (0004H)
7
6 P36 COM7 MUL6
5 P35 COM6 MUL5 5
4 P34 COM5 MUL4 4
3 P33 SEG51 MUL3 3
2 P32 SEG50 MJUL2 2
1 P31 SEG49 MJUL1 1
0 P30 SEG48 MJUL0 0 (Initial value: *000 0000) (Initial value: *111 1111)
7
6
P3LCR
Port P3 control (set for each bit individually)
0: P3 input/output port or function except LCD segment or common output 1: LCD segment output/common output
R/W
P3PRD (000AH) Read only
7
6 P36
5 P35
4 P34
3 P33
2 P32
1 P31
0 P30
Note: With ports assigned as MUL6 to MUL0, assigned pins can be switched by the multi function register (MULSEL). The assigned functions are shown in "5.7 Multi Function Register".
Page 56
TMP86CS25AFG
5.4 Port P5 (P57 to P50)
Port P5 is an 8-bit input/output port which is also used as a segment pins of LCD. When used as input port, the respective output latch (P5DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P5DR is initialized to "1". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P5LCR should be set to "1". When used as an output port, the respective P5LCR bit should be set to "0". P5 port output latch (P5DR) and P5 port terminal input (P5PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P5DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P5PRD register should be read. If the terminal input data which is configured as LCD segment output is read, unstable data is read.
STOP OUTEN P5LCRi P5LCRi input Data input (P5PRD) Data input (P5DR) Data output (P5DR) LCD data output D Q P5i Note: i = 7 to 0 D Q
Output latch
Figure 5-5 Port 5
P5DR (0005H) R/W P5LCR (002AH)
7 P57 SEG47 7
6 P56 SEG46 6
5 P55 SEG45 5
4 P54 SEG44 4
3 P53 SEG43 3
2 P52 SEG42 2
1 P51 SEG41 1
0 P50 SEG40 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P5LCR
Port P5/segment output select (set for each bit individually)
0: P5 input/output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P5PRD (000BH) Read only
7 P57
6 P56
5 P55
4 P54
3 P53
2 P52
1 P51
0 P50
Page 57
5. I/O Ports
5.5 Port P6 (P67 to P60) TMP86CS25AFG
5.5 Port P6 (P67 to P60)
Port P6 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. Port P6 is also used as an analog input, Key on Wake up input, timer/counter input and external interrupt input. Input/output mode is specified by the P6 control register (P6CR), the P6 output latch (P6DR), and ADCCR1. During reset, P6CR and P6DR are initialized to "0" and ADCCR1 is set to "1". At the same time, the input data of pins P67 to P60 are fixed to "0". To use port P6 as an input port, external interrupt input, timer/counter input or key on wake up input, set data of P6DR to "1" and P6CR to "0". To use it as an output port, set data of P6CR to "1". To use it as an analog input, set data of P6DR to "0" and P6CR to "0", and start the AD. It is the penetration electric current measures by the analog voltage. Pins not used for analog input can be used as I/O ports. During AD conversion, output instructions should not be executed to keep a precision. In addition, a variable signal should not be input to a port adjacent to the analog input during AD conversion. When the AD converter is in use (P6DR = 0), bits mentioned above are read as "0" by executing input instructions.
STOPj Key on Wake up Analog input AINDS SAIN P6CRi P6CRi input Data input (P6DR) D Q
Data output (P6DR) STOP
D
Q
Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: Note 4:
P6i
i = 7 to 0, j = 7 to 4 STOP is bit7 in SYSCR1 SAIN is bit 0 to 3 in ADCCRA STOPj is bit 4 to 7 is STOPCR.
Figure 5-6 Port 6
P6DR (0006H) R/W
7 P67 AIN7 STOP5 7
6 P66 AIN6 STOP4 6
5 P65 AIN5 STOP3 5
4 P64 AIN4 STOP2 4
3 P63 AIN3
INT0
2 P62 AIN2 ECNT 2
1 P61 AIN1 ECIN 1
0 P60 AIN0 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
3
P6CR (000CH)
AINDS = 1 (AD unused) P6CR I/O control for port P6 (specified for each bit) P6DR = "0" 0 1 Input "0" fixed P6DR = "1" Input mode
AINDS = 0 (AD used) P6DR = "0" AD input P6DR = "1" Input mode R/W
Output mode
Output mode
Note 1: Do not set output mode to pin which is used for an analog input. Note 2: When used as an INT0, ECNT and ECIN pins of a secondary function, the respective bit of P6CR should be set to "0" and the P6 should set to "1". Note 3: When used as an STOP2 to STOP5 pins of Key on Wake up, the respective bit of P6CR should be set to "0". Note 4: When a read instruction for port P6 is executed, the bit of Analog input mode becomes read data "0". Note 5: Although P6DR is a read/writer register, because it is also used as an input mode control function, read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulate instructions cannot be used. Read-modify-write instruction writes the all data of 8-bit after data is read and modified. Because a bit setting Input mode read data of terminal, the output latch is changed by these instruction. So P6 port can not input data.
Page 58
TMP86CS25AFG
5.6 Port P7 (P77 to P70)
Port P7 is an 8-bit input/output port which is also used as an external interrupt input, a divider output a segment pins of LCD. When used as input port or a secondary function pins, the respective output latch (P7DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P7DR is initialized to "1". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P7LCR should be set to "1". When used as an output port, the respective P7LCR bit should be set to "0". P7 port output latch (P7DR) and P7 port terminal input (P7PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P7DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P7PRD register should be read. If the terminal input data which is configured as LCD segment output is read, unstable data is read.
Control input Terminal input (P7PRD) P7LCRi P7LCRi input Output latch data (P7DR) Data output (P7DR) Control output STOP OUTEN LCD data output D Q P7i Note: i = 7 to 0 D Q
Output latch
Figure 5-7 Port 7
P7DR (0007H) R/W P7LCR (002BH)
7 P77 COM15
SCK1
6 P76 COM14 SO0 6
5 P75 COM13 SI1 5
4 P74 COM12 MUL3 4
3 P73 COM11 MUL2 3
2 P72 COM10 MUL1 2
1 P71 COM9 MUL0 1
0 P70 COM8 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 1111 1111)
7
P7LCR
Port P7/segment output select (set for each bit individually)
0: P7 input/Output port 1: segment output
R/W
P7PRD (000DH) Read only
7 P77
6 P76
5 P75
4 P74
3 P73
2 P72
1 P71
0 P70
Note: With ports assigned as MUL6 to MUL0, assigned pins can be switched by the multi function register (MULSEL). The assigned functions are shown in "5.7 Multi Function Register".
Page 59
5. I/O Ports
5.7 Multi Function Register TMP86CS25AFG
5.7 Multi Function Register
With ports assigned as MUL6 to MUL0, assigned pins can be switched by the multi function register (MULSEL). Multi Function Register
MULSEL (0FC0H) 7 6 MUL6 5 MUL5 4 MUL4 3 MUL3 2 MUL2 1 MUL1 0 MUL0
MUL6 MUL5 MUL4 MUL3 MUL2 MUL1 MUL0
INT3 function pin select INT2 function pin select INT1 function pin select
PPG6/PWM6/PDO6 and TC6 functions pin select
0: P14 1: P36 0: P13 1: P35 0: P12 1: P34 0: P33 1: P74 0: P32 1: P73 0: P31 1: P72 0: P30 1: P71 R/W
PPG4/PWM4/PDO4 and TC4 functions pin select
PWM3/PDO3 and TC3 functions pin select
DVO function pin select
Page 60
TMP86CS25AFG
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine. The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as "reset request" or "interrupt request". Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to "reset request". When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise.
6.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
fc/2 or fs/2 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/219 or fs/211 fc/217 or fs/29
23 15
Selector
Binary counters Clock Clear 1 2 Overflow WDT output
R S Q Reset request INTWDT interrupt request
2
Interrupt request
Internal reset Q SR
WDTEN WDTT
Writing disable code
Writing clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H WDTCR1
0035H WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 6-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 61
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86CS25AFG
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
6.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When WDTCR1 is set to "1" at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is initialized. When WDTCR1 is set to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated. The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE/SLEEP mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE/SLEEP mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to WDTCR1.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
LD LD LD (WDTCR2), 4EH (WDTCR1), 00001101B (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters. : WDTT 10, WDTOUT 1 : Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing WDTT).
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: :
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: : LD (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters.
Page 62
TMP86CS25AFG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 (ATAS) 4 (ATOUT) 3 WDTEN 2 WDTT 1 0 WDTOUT (Initial value: **11 1001)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.) 1: Enable NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 217/fs 215/fs 213/fs 211/fs SLOW1/2 mode 217/fs 215fs 213fs 211/fs
Write only
WDTT
Watchdog timer detection time [s]
00 01 10 11
225/fc 223/fc 221fc 219/fc
Write only
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer output select
0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
Note 1: After clearing WDTOUT to "0", the program cannot set it to "1". Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a don't care is read. Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode. After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated. Note 5: To clear WDTEN, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in "1.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable".
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code) D2H: Enable assigning address trap area Others: Invalid
Write only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1 = 0. Note 2: *: Don't care Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. Note 4: Write the clear code 4EH using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1.
6.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1 to "1" enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1 is initialized to "1" during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 63
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86CS25AFG
6.2.3
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to "0". 2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH). 3. Set WDTCR1 to "0". 4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
DI LD LDW (WDTCR2), 04EH (WDTCR1), 0B101H : IMF 0 : Clears the binary coutner : WDTEN 0, WDTCR2 Disable code
Table 6-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz) Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 2.097 524.288 m 131.072 m 32.768 m NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 1 4 1 250 m 62.5 m SLOW mode 4 1 250 m 62.5 m
6.2.4
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1 is cleared to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1.
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD LD SP, 083FH (WDTCR1), 00001000B : Sets the stack pointer : WDTOUT 0
Page 64
TMP86CS25AFG
6.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1 is set to "1", a watchdog timer reset request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When a watchdog timer reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
219/fc [s] 217/fc Clock Binary counter Overflow INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1= "0")
(WDTT=11) 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0
Internal reset
(WDTCR1= "1")
A reset occurs Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 6-2 Watchdog Timer Interrupt
Page 65
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86CS25AFG
6.3 Address Trap
The Watchdog Timer Control Register 1 and 2 share the addresses with the control registers to generate address traps. Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 ATAS 4 ATOUT 3 (WDTEN) 2 (WDTT) 1 0 (WDTOUT) (Initial value: **11 1001)
ATAS
Select address trap generation in the internal RAM area Select opertion at address trap
0: Generate no address trap 1: Generate address traps (After setting ATAS to "1", writing the control code D2H to WDTCR2 is reguired) 0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
ATOUT
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code and address trap area control code
D2H: Enable address trap area selection (ATRAP control code) 4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (WDT clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (WDT disable code) Others: Invalid
Write only
6.3.1
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS)
WDTCR1 specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the internal RAM area. To execute an instruction in the internal RAM area, clear WDTCR1 to "0". To enable the WDTCR1 setting, set WDTCR1 and then write D2H to WDTCR2. Executing an instruction in the SFR or DBR area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the setting in WDTCR1.
6.3.2
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT)
When an address trap is generated, either the interrupt request or the reset request can be selected by WDTCR1.
6.3.3
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
While WDTCR1 is "0", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) will be generated. An address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When an address trap interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand.
Page 66
TMP86CS25AFG
6.3.4
Address Trap Reset
While WDTCR1 is "1", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. When an address trap reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When an address trap reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
Page 67
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86CS25AFG
Page 68
TMP86CS25AFG
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base timer interrupt (INTTBT).
7.1 Time Base Timer
7.1.1 Configuration
MPX
fc/223 or fs/215 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/216 or fs/28 fc/214 or fs/26 fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/29 or fs/2
Source clock
Falling edge detector
IDLE0, SLEEP0 release request
INTTBT interrupt request
3 TBTCK TBTCR Time base timer control register TBTEN
Figure 7-1 Time Base Timer configuration 7.1.2 Control
Time Base Timer is controled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR). Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 TBTEN 2 1 TBTCK 0 (Initial Value: 0000 0000)
TBTEN
Time Base Timer enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 fc/223 fc/221 fc/216 fc/2
14
DV7CK = 1 fs/215 fs/213 fs/28 fs/2
6
SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/215 fs/213 - - - - - - R/W
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt Frequency select : [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
fc/213 fc/2
12
fs/25 fs/2
4
fc/211 fc/2
9
fs/23 fs/2
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care
Page 69
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer TMP86CS25AFG
Note 2: The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD LD DI SET (EIRL) . 6 (TBTCR) , 00000010B (TBTCR) , 00001010B ; TBTCK 010 ; TBTEN 1 ; IMF 0
Table 7-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz] TBTCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1.91 7.63 244.14 976.56 1953.13 3906.25 7812.5 31250 NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 1 1 4 128 512 1024 2048 4096 16384 1 4 - - - - - - SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
7.1.3
Function
An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider output of the timing generato which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled. The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( Figure 7-2 ).
Source clock
TBTCR
INTTBT Interrupt period Enable TBT
Figure 7-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Page 70
TMP86CS25AFG
7.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
7.2.1
Configuration
Output latch Data output D Q DVO pin
fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/210 or fs/22
MPX A B CY D S 2 DVOCK TBTCR Divider output control register (a) configuration DVOEN
Port output latch TBTCR
DVO pin output (b) Timing chart
Figure 7-3 Divider Output 7.2.2 Control
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register. Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) DVOEN 6 DVOCK 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DVOEN
Divider output enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22 SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22
R/W
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO) frequency selection: [Hz]
00 01 10 11
fc/213 fc/212 fc/211 fc/210
R/W
Note: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency.
Page 71
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.2 Divider Output (DVO) TMP86CS25AFG
Example :1.95 kHz pulse output (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B (TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOCK "00" ; DVOEN "1"
Table 7-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz] DVOCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 1.953 k 3.906 k 7.813 k 15.625 k DV7CK = 1 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k
Page 72
8.1 Configuration
fc/212 or fs/24
TREG1B Y S 2 SGEDG 1 Window pulse generator TC1M 2
INTTC1
fc/213 or fs/25
fc/214 or fs/26
A B C
PWM6/PDO6/PPG6
WGPSCK
TC6OUT
1 Edge detector C B A Y S
Pulse width measurement mode
MUL3 pin Pin
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
ECNT Pin
TC1S
TC1CK
TC1M
TC1C
TMP86CS25AFG
TC1CR1
SEG SGP SGEDG WGPSCK TC6OUT
Page 73
10 11 00 S Y H
Timer/Event count modes Frequency measurement mode
CLEAR signal 18- bit up-counter
F/F
ECIN Pin
Y
CMP
1
1 TC1SR TREG1AL TREG1AM TREG1AH
fs/215 or fc/223 fs/25 or fc/213 fs/23 or fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 fs fc
C D E F G B A
3
22
1
12121
TC1CR2
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.2 Control TMP86CS25AFG
8.2 Control
The Timer/counter 1 is controlled by timer/counter 1 control registers (TC1CR1/TC1CR2), an 18-bit timer register (TREG1A), and an 8-bit internal window gate pulse setting register (TREG1B). Timer register
7 TREG1AH (0012H) R/W - 6 - 5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1 0 (Initial value: 00)
TREG1AH
7 TREG1AM (0011H) R/W
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TREG1AM
7 TREG1AL (0010H) R/W
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TREG1AL
7 TREG1B (0013H)
6 Ta
5
4
3
2 Tb
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes WGPSCK DV7CK=0 Setting "H" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 00 01 10 (16 - Ta) x 212/fc (16 - Ta) x 2 /fc (16 - Ta) x 214/fc
13
DV7CK=1 (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 2 /fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs
5
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs R/W
Ta
Tb
Setting "L" level period of the window gate pulse
(16 - Tb) x 212/fc (16 - Tb) x 213/fc (16 - Tb) x 214/fc
(16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs
Page 74
TMP86CS25AFG
Timer/counter 1 control register 1
7 TC1CR1 (0014H) TC1C 6 TC1S 5 4 3 TC1CK 2 1 TC1M 0 (Initial value: 1000 1000)
TC1C
Counter/overfow flag controll
0: 1: 00: 10: *1:
Clear Counter/overflow flag ( "1" is automatically set after clearing.) Not clear Counter/overflow flag Stop and counter clear and overflow flag clear Start Reserved NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes DV7CK="0" DV7CK="1" fc fs fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 SLOW1/2 mode fc fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 SLEEP1/2 mode fc fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 -
R/W
TC1S
TC1 start control
R/W
TC1CK
TC1 source clock select
000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: 00: 01: 10: 11:
fc fs fc/223 fc/2
13
R/W
fc/211 fc/2
7
fc/23
External clock (ECIN pin input) Timer/Event counter mode Reserved Pulse width measurement mode Frequency measurement mode
TC1M
TC1 mode select
R/W
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz] fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] * ; Don't care Note 2: Writing to the low-byte of the timer register 1A (TREG1AL, TREG1AM), the compare function is inhibited until the highbyte (TREG1AH) is written. Note 3: Set the mode and source clock, and edge (selection) when the TC1 stops (TC1S=00). Note 4: "fc" can be selected as the source clock only in the timer mode during SLOW mode and in the pulse width measurement mode during NORMAL 1/2 or IDLE 1/2 mode. Note 5: When a read instruction is executed to the timer register (TREG1A), the counter immediate value, not the register set value, is read out. Therefore it is impossible to read out the written value of TREG1A. To read the counter value, the read instruction should be executed when the counter stops to avoid reading unstable value. Note 6: Set the timer register (TREG1A) to 1. Note 7: When using the timer mode and pulse width measurement mode, set TC1CK (TC1 source clock select) to internal clock. Note 8: When using the event counter mode, set TC1CK (TC1 source clock select) to external clock. Note 9: Because the read value is different from the written value, do not use read-modify-write instructions to TREG1A. Note 10:fc/27, fc/23can not be used as source clock in SLOW/SLEEP mode. Note 11:The read data of bits 7 to 2 in TREG1AH are always "0". (Data "1" can not be written.)
Page 75
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.2 Control TMP86CS25AFG
Timer/Counter 1 control register 2
7 TC1CR2 (0015H) "0" 6 SGP 5 4 SGEDG 3 WGPSCK 2 1 TC6OUT 0 "0" (Initial value: *000 000*)
SGP
Window gate pulse select
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
ECNT input Internal window gate pulse (TREG1B) PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 (TC6)output Reserved Interrupts at the falling edge Interrupts at the falling/rising edges NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes DV7CK="0" DV7CK="1" 24/fs 25/fs 26/fs Reserved SLOW1/2 mode 24/fs 25/fs 26/fs Reserved SLEEP1/2 mode 24/fs 25/fs 26/fs Reserved
R/W
SGEDG
Window gate pulse interrupt edge select
WGPSCK
Window gate pulse source clock select
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
212/fc 213/fc 214/fc Reserved
R/W
TC6OUT
TC6 output (PWM6/PDO6/PPG6) external output select
Output to MUL3 pin No output to MUL3 pin
R/W
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz] fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] *; Don't care Note 2: Set the mode, source clock, and edge (selection) when the TC1 stops (TC1S = 00). Note 3: If there is no need to use PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 as window gate pulse of TC1 always write "0" to TC6OUT. Note 4: Make sure to write TC1CR2 "0,7" to bit 0 in TC1CR2.
Page 76
TMP86CS25AFG
TC1 status register
7 TC1SR (0016H) HECF 6 HEOVF 5 "0" 4 "0" 3 "0" 2 "0" 1 "0" 0 "0" (Initial value: 0000 0000)
HECF
Operating Status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Stop (during Tb) or disable Under counting (during Ta) No overflow Overflow status
Read only
HEOVF
Counter overflow monitor
8.3 Function
TC1 has four operating modes. The timer mode of the TC1 is used at warm-up when switching form SLOW mode to NORMAL2 mode.
8.3.1
Timer mode
In this mode, counting up is performed using the internal clock. The contents of TREGIA are compared with the contents of up-counter. If a match is found, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. Counting up resumes after the counter is cleared.
Table 8-1 Source clock (internal clock) of Timer/Counter 1
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode SLOW Mode DV7CK = 0 fc/223 [Hz] fc/213 fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 fc fs DV7CK = 1 fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 fc fs fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 fc (Note) fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 0.52 s 512 ms 128 ms 8 ms 0.5 ms 62.5 ns SLEEP Mode fc = 16 MHz Resolution fs =32.768 kHz 1s 0.98 ms 244 ms 30.5 ms Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 38.2 h 2.2 min 0.6 min 2.1 s 131.1 ms 16.4 ms fs =32.768 kHz 72.8 h 4.3 min 1.07 min 8s
Note: When fc is selected for the source clock in SLOW mode, the lower bits 11 of TREG1A is invalid, and a match of the upper bits 7 makes interrupts.
Page 77
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CS25AFG
Command Start
Internal clock
Up counter
0
1
2
3
4
n-1
n0
1
2
3
4
5
6
TREG1A
n
Match detect Counter clear
INTTC1 interrupt
Figure 8-1 Timing chart for timer mode 8.3.2 Event Counter mode
It is a mode to count up at the falling edge of the ECIN pin input. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to the external clock. The countents of TREG1A are compared with the contents of up-counter. If a match is found, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. Counting up resumes for ECIN pin input edge each after the counter is cleared. The maximum applied frequency is fc/24 [Hz] in NORMAL 1/2 or IDLE 1/2 mode and fs/24[Hz] in SLOW or SLEEP mode . Two or more machine cycles are required for both the "H" and "L" levels of the pulse width.
Start
ECIN pin input
Up counter
0
1
2
n-1
n
0
1
2
TREG1A
n
Match Detect Counter clear
INTTC1 interrupt
Figure 8-2 Event counter mode timing chart
Page 78
TMP86CS25AFG
8.3.3
Pulse Width Measurement mode
In this mode, pulse widths are counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse between ECIN pin input (window pulse) and the internal clock. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to suitable internal clock . An INTTC1 interrupt is generated when the ECIN input detects the falling edge of the window pulse or both rising and falling edges of the window pulse, that can be selected by TC1CR2. The contents of TREG1A should be read while the count is stopped (ECIN pin is low), then clear the counter using TC1CR1 (Normally, execute these process in the interrupt program). When the counter is not cleared by TC1CR1, counting-up resumes from previous stopping value. When up counter is counted up from 3FFFFH to 00000H, an overflow occurs. At that time, TC1SR is set to "1". TC1SR remains the previous data until the counter is required to be cleared by TC1CR1.
Note:In pulse width measurement mode, if TC1CR1 is written to "00" while ECIN input is "1", INTTC1 interrupt occurs. According to the following step, when timer counter is stopped, INTTC1 interrupt latch should be cleared to "0".
Example :
TC1STOP : | DI CLR LD LD SET EI | | (EIRH). 0 (TC1CR1), 00011010B (ILH), 11111110B (EIRH). 0 | ; Clear IMF ; Clear bit0 of EIRH ; Stop timer couter 1 ; Clear bit0 of ILH ; Set bit0 of EIRH ; Set IMF
Note 1: When SGEDG (window gate pulse interrupt edge select) is set to both edges and ECIN pin input is "1" in the pulse width measurement mode, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated by setting TC1S (TC1 start control) to "10" (start). Note 2: In the pulse width measurement mode, HECF (operating status monitor) cannot used. Note 3: Because the up counter is counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse (between ECIN pin input and the internal clock), if ECIN input becomes falling edge while internal source clock is "H" level, the up counter stops plus "1".
Count Start
Count Stop
Count Start
ECIN pin input
Internal clock
AND-ed pulse (Internal signal) Up counter 0 1 2 3 n-2 n-1 n n+1
Read Clear Interrupt
0
1
2
INTTC1 interrupt
TC1CR1
Figure 8-3 Pulse width measurement mode timing chart
Page 79
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CS25AFG
8.3.4
Frequency Measurement mode
In this mode, the frequency of ECIN pin input pulse is measured. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to the external clock. The edge of the ECIN input pulse is counted during "H" level of the window gate pulse selected by TC1CR2. To use ECNT input as a window gate pulse, TC1CR2 should be set to "00". An INTTC1 interrupt is generated on the falling edge or both the rising/falling edges of the window gate pulse, that can be selected by TC1CR2. In the interrupt service program, read the contents of TREG1A while the count is stopped (window gate pulse is low), then clear the counter using TC1CR1. When the counter is not cleared, counting up resumes from previous stopping value. The window pulse status can be monitored by TC1SR. When up counter is counted up from 3FFFFH to 00000H, an overflow occurs. At that time, TC1SR is set to "1". TC1SR remains the previous data until the counter is required to be cleared by TC1CR1. Using TC6 output (PWM6/PDO6/PPG6) for the window gate pulse, external output of PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 to MUL3 pin can be controlled using TC1CR2. Zero-clearing TC1CR2 outputs PWM6/ PDO6/PPG6 to MUL3 pin; setting 1 in TC1CR2 does not output PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 to MUL3 pin. (TC1CR2 is used to control output to MUL3 pin only. Thus, use the timer counter 6 control register to operate/stop PWM6/PDO6/PPG6.)
When the internal window gate pulse is selected, the window gate pulse is set as follows. Table 8-2 Internal window gate pulse setting time
NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes WGPSCK DV7CK=0 Setting "H" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 00 01 10 (16 - Ta) x 212/fc (16 - Ta) x 213/fc
14
DV7CK=1 (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs
6
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs R/W
Ta
(16 - Ta) x 2 /fc (16 - Tb) x 212/fc (16 - Tb) x 2 /fc (16 - Tb) x 214/fc
13
(16 - Ta) x 2 /fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 2 /fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs
5
Tb
Setting "L" level period of the window gate pulse
The internal window gate pulse consists of "H" level period (Ta) that is counting time and "L" level period (Tb) that is counting stop time. Ta or Tb can be individually set by TREG1B. One cycle contains Ta + Tb.
Note 1: Because the internal window gate pulse is generated in synchronization with the internal divider, it may be delayed for a maximum of one cycle of the source clock (WGPSCK) immediately after start of the timer. Note 2: Set the internal window gate pulse when the timer counter is not operating or during the Tb period. When Tb is overwritten during the Tb period, the update is valid from the next Tb period. Note 3: Because the up counter is counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse (between ECIN pin input and window gate pulse), if window gate pulse becomes falling edge while ECIN input is "H" level, the up counter stops plus "1". Therefore, if ECIN input is always "H" level, count value becomes "1".
Page 80
TMP86CS25AFG
Table 8-3 Table Setting Ta and Tb (WGPSCK = 10, fc = 16 MHz)
Setting Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting time 16.38ms 15.36ms 14.34ms 13.31ms 12.29ms 11.26ms 10.24ms 9.22ms Setting Value 8 9 A B C D E F Setting time 8.19ms 7.17ms 6.14ms 5.12ms 4.10ms 3.07ms 2.05ms 1.02ms
Table 8-4 Table Setting Ta and Tb (WGPSCK = 10, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Setting Valuen 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting time 31.25ms 29.30ms 27.34ms 25.39ms 23.44ms 21.48ms 19.53ms 17.58ms Setting Value 8 9 A B C D E F Setting time 15.63ms 13.67ms 11.72ms 9.77ms 7.81ms 5.86ms 3.91ms 1.95ms
ECIN pin input Window gate pulse AND-ed pulse (Internal signal) Up counter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ta
Tb
Ta
INTTC1 interrupt
Read Clear
TC1CR1
Figure 8-4 Timing chart for the frequency measurement mode (Window gate pulse falling interrupt)
Page 81
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86CS25AFG
Page 82
TMP86CS25AFG
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC4 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC4 pin TC4M TC4S TFF4
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC4S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F4
PDO4/PWM4/ PPG4 pin
TC4CK TC4CR TTREG4 PWREG4
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF4
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC3S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC3 pin TC3M TC3S TFF3
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC3 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F3
PDO3/PWM3/ pin
TC3CK TC3CR TTREG3 PWREG3
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF3
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 9-1 8-Bit TimerCouter 3, 4
Page 83
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
9.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG3, PWREG3). TimerCounter 3 Timer Register
TTREG3 (001CH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG3 (002CH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG3) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 3 Control Register
TC3CR (0018H) 7 TFF3 6 5 TC3CK 4 3 TC3S 2 1 TC3M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF3
Time F/F3 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC3CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC3S TC3 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC3M TC3M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC4M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC3S= 1 0), do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings. To start the timer operation (TC3S= 0 1), TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC4CR, where TC3M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4CR and TC4CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 9-1 and Table 9-2.
Page 84
TMP86CS25AFG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 85
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG4 and PWREG4). TimerCounter 4 Timer Register
TTREG4 (001DH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG4 (002DH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG4) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 4 Control Register
TC4CR (0019H) 7 TFF4 6 5 TC4CK 4 3 TC4S 2 1 TC4M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF4
Timer F/F4 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC4 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC4CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC4S TC4 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC4M TC4M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC4S= 1 0), do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings. To start the timer operation (TC4S= 0 1), TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC4M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC4 overflow signal regardless of the TC3CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC4M, where TC3CR must be set to 011.
Page 86
TMP86CS25AFG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4S and TFF4, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 9-1 and Table 9-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93.
Table 9-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 9-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 87
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
Table 9-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 256 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 2 (PWREG4, 3) 65534 1 (PWREG4, 3) < (TTREG4, 3) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG4, 3) + 1 < (TTREG4, 3) Register Value
Note: n = 3 to 4
Page 88
TMP86CS25AFG
9.3 Function
The TimerCounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 (TC3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
9.3.1
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3, 4 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Repeated Cycle
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter4, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC4CR), 00010000B (TC4CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC4. (EIRH). 3 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG4), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 89
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
TC4CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG4
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 9.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
TC4CR TC4 pin input
Counter
TTREG4
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 9.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 90
TMP86CS25AFG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC4 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG4), 3DH (TC4CR), 00010001B (TC4CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC4.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Page 91
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Counter
0
1
2
Figure 9-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 92
TTREG4
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
Set F/F
PDO4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86CS25AFG
TMP86CS25AFG
9.3.4
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 3, 4
Table 9-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 93
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG4
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG4
Figure 9-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
m Shift Shift m
Match detect Match detect
Page 94
n One cycle period m
PWREG4
?
n
p Shift p
Match detect
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
n
p
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CS25AFG
TMP86CS25AFG
9.3.5
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the upper byte and lower byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC3CR), 13H :Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRH). 3 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG3), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC4CR), 04H (TC4CR), 0CH
TC4CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG3 (Lower byte) TTREG4 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 95
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
9.3.6
16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC3 pin. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG3), and upper byte (TTREG4) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
9.3.7
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4 logic level.) Since PWREG4 and 3 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG4 and 3 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG4 and 3. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG4 and 3. Set the lower byte (PWREG3) and upper byte (PWREG3) in this order to program PWREG4 and 3. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG4 and 3 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG4 and 3. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG4 and 3, reading data of PWREG4 and 3 is previous value until INTTC4 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG4 and 3 immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing thePWM4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 96
TMP86CS25AFG
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC4CR).7 : Sets the PWM4 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM4 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 9-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2 s fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
8.2 ms 4.1 ms
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 056H (TC4CR), 05EH
Page 97
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG3
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG3
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG4
n
m
p
Write to PWREG4
Figure 9-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 98
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
an
bm
cp
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CS25AFG
TMP86CS25AFG
9.3.8
16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fc/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG3 TTREG4, PWREG3 PWREG4) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TTREG3), 8002H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 057H (TC4CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC4CR).7: Sets the PPG4 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 3, 4
Page 99
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 9-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC40)
Page 100
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG3 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG4 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F4
PPG4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CS25AFG
TMP86CS25AFG
9.3.9
Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCouter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG4 and 3 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 3, 4
9.3.9.1
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock.
Table 9-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRH). 3 (SYSCR2).6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 : Starts TC4 and 3.
CLR RETI : VINTTC4: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 101
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
9.3.9.2
High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock.
Table 9-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRH). 3 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC4 and 3.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC4: DW : PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 102
TMP86CS25AFG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC6 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
7
fs
fc/2 fc
TC6 pin TC6M TC6S TFF6
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC6S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F6
PDO6/PWM6/ PPG6 pin
TC6CK TC6CR TTREG6 PWREG6
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF6
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC5S fc/211 or fs/23
fc/2 fc/25 3 fc/2
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC5M TC5S
A B C D E F G S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode
INTTC5 interrupt request
Timer mode
TC5CK TC5CR TTREG5 PWREG5
Figure 10-1 8-Bit TimerCouter 5, 6
Page 103
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
10.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 5 is controlled by the TimerCounter 5 control register (TC5CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG5, PWREG5). TimerCounter 5 Timer Register
TTREG5 (001EH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG5 (002EH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG5) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG5) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 5 Control Register
TC5CR (001AH) 7 6 5 TC5CK 4 3 TC5S 2 1 TC5M 0 (Initial value: 000 0000)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 TC5CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC5S TC5 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC5M TC5M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**: Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer Reserved Reserved 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC6M.) Reserved fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc Reserved
SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8) R/W
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC5S= 1 0), do not change the TC5M and TC5CK settings. To start the timer operation (TC5S= 0 1), TC5M and TC5CK can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC6CR, where TC5M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6CR and TC6CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2. Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 104
TMP86CS25AFG
The TimerCounter 6 is controlled by the TimerCounter 6 control register (TC6CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG6 and PWREG6). TimerCounter 6 Timer Register
TTREG6 (001FH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG6 (002FH) R/ W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG6) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG6) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 6 Control Register
TC6CR (001BH) 7 TFF6 6 5 TC6CK 4 3 TC6S 2 1 TC6M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF6
Timer F/F6 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC6 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC6CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC6S TC6 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC6M TC6M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC6S= 1 0), do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings. To start the timer operation (TC6S= 0 1), TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC6M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC6 overflow signal regardless of the TC5CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC6M, where TC5CR must be set to 011.
Page 105
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6S and TFF6, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103. Note 9: To use the PDO, PWM or PPG mode, a pulse is not output from the timer output pin when TC1CR2 is set to 1. To output a pulse from the timer output pin, clear TC1CR2 to 0.
Table 10-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/2 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - -
3
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC5 pin input - - - - - - - -
TC6 pin input - - - - - - -
- -
- -
- -
- - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 10-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input - - - - - - - - TC6 pin input - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 106
TMP86CS25AFG
Table 10-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 256 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 2 (PWREG6, 5) 65534 1 (PWREG6, 5) < (TTREG6, 5) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG6, 5) + 1 < (TTREG6, 5) Register Value
Note: n = 5 to 6
Page 107
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
10.3 Function
The TimerCounter 6 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 (TC5, 6) are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
10.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 10-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 5, 6 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Repeated Cycle
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter6, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC6CR), 00010000B (TC6CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC6. (EIRH). 4 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG6), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 108
TMP86CS25AFG
TC6CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG6
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 10.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC6)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 6
TC6CR TC6 pin input
Counter
TTREG6
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 10.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 109
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC6 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG6), 3DH (TC6CR), 00010001B (TC6CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC6.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 6
Page 110
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 10-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 111
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG6
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
Set F/F
PDO6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86CS25AFG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
10.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 6
Table 10-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 112
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG4
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG4
PWREG6
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 10-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Page 113
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
n
p
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CS25AFG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
10.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the upper byte and lower byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 10-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC5CR), 13H :Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRH). 4 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG5), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC6CR), 04H (TC6CR), 0CH
TC6CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG5 (Lower byte) TTREG6 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 114
TMP86CS25AFG
10.3.6 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6 logic level.) Since PWREG6 and 5 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG6 and 5 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG6 and 5 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG6 and 5. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG6 and 5. Set the lower byte (PWREG5) and upper byte (PWREG5) in this order to program PWREG6 and 5. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG6 and 5 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG6 and 5. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG6 and 5, reading data of PWREG6 and 5 is previous value until INTTC6 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG6 and 5 immediately after the INTTC6 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC6 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing thePWM6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC6CR).7 : Sets the PWM6 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM6 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 10-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/2 fc/2 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
7 5 3
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2 s fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2 fc/2
7 5 3
fs fc/2 fc
8.2 ms 4.1 ms
Page 115
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 056H (TC6CR), 05EH
Page 116
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG5
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG5
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG6
n
m
p
Write to PWREG6
Figure 10-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 117
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
an
cp
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CS25AFG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
10.3.7 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG5 TTREG6, PWREG5 PWREG6) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TTREG5), 8002H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 057H (TC6CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC6CR).7: Sets the PPG6 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 5, 6
Page 118
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 10-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC60)
Page 119
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG5 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG6 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F6
PPG6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CS25AFG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
10.3.8 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCouter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG6 and 5 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 5, 6
10.3.8.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. Table 10-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Maximum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR SET (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRH). 4 (SYSCR2).6 (TC5CR), 43H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 : Starts TC6 and 5.
CLR RETI : VINTTC6: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 120
TMP86CS25AFG
10.3.8.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. Table 10-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC5CR), 63H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRH). 4 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC6 and 5.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC6: DW : PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 121
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
Page 122
TMP86CS25AFG
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UARTCR1
Transmit data buffer
TDBUF
Receive data buffer
RDBUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD
INTTXD
INTRXD
TXD
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UARTSR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC5
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UARTCR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 11-1 UART (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 123
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.2 Control TMP86CS25AFG
11.2 Control
UART is controlled by the UART Control Registers (UARTCR1, UARTCR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UARTSR).
UART Control Register1
UARTCR1 (0025H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC5 ( Input INTTC5) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UARTCR1 and UARTCR1 should be set to "0" before UARTCR1 is changed.
UART Control Register2
UARTCR2 (0026H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejectio time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UARTCR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UARTCR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UARTCR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 124
TMP86CS25AFG
UART Status Register
UARTSR (0025H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART Receive Data Buffer
RDBUF (0F9BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART Transmit Data Buffer
TDBUF (0F9BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 125
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86CS25AFG
11.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UARTCR1), and parity (Select parity in UARTCR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UARTCR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 11-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 11-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 11-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 126
TMP86CS25AFG
11.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART is set of UARTCR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 11-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC5 is used as the UART transfer rate (when UARTCR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC5 source clock [Hz] / TTREG5 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
11.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UARTCR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 11-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 127
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86CS25AFG
11.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UARTCR1.
11.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UARTCR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UARTCR1.
11.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
11.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UARTCR1 to "1". Read UARTSR to check UARTSR = "1", then write data in TDBUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TDBUF zero-clears UARTSR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UARTCR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UARTSR is set to "1" and an INTTXD interrupt is generated. While UARTCR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UARTCR1 to when send data are written to TDBUF, the TXD pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UARTSR, then write data in TDBUF. Otherwise, UARTSR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
11.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UARTCR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD pin, the receive data are transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UARTSR is set and an INTRXD interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RDBUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UARTCR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 128
TMP86CS25AFG
11.9 Status Flag
11.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UARTSR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears PERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-5 Generation of Parity Error 11.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UARTSR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears FERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-6 Generation of Framing Error 11.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RDBUF, overrun error flag UARTSR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RDBUF are not affected. The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
Page 129
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.9 Status Flag TMP86CS25AFG
UARTSR
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RDBUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UARTSR
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears OERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UARTSR is cleared.
11.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RDBUF sets receive data buffer full flag UARTSR to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RDBUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears RBFL.
UARTSR
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UARTSR is set during the period between reading the UARTSR and reading the RDBUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RDBUF. Therefore, after reading the RDBUF, read the UARTSR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
11.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TDBUF, UARTSR is set to "1", that is, when data in TDBUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the TDBUF is written after reading the UARTSR.
Page 130
TMP86CS25AFG
Data write
TDBUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UARTSR After reading UARTSR writing TDBUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 11-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 11.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TDBUF (UARTSR = "1"), transmit end flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is stated after writing the TDBUF.
Shift register
TXD pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TDBUF
Start
Bit 0
UARTSR
UARTSR
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 11-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 131
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.9 Status Flag TMP86CS25AFG
Page 132
TMP86CS25AFG
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO0)
The TMP86CS25AFG has a clocked-synchronous 8-bit serial interface. Serial interface has an 8-byte transmit and receive data buffer that can automatically and continuously transfer up to 64 bits of data. Serial interface is connected to outside peripherl devices via SO0, SI0, SCK0 port.
12.1 Configuration
SIO control / status register
SIO0SR
SIO0CR1
SIO0CR2
CPU
Control circuit
Buffer control circuit Shift register Shift clock
Transmit and receive data buffer (8 bytes in DBR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO0
Serial data output 8-bit transfer 4-bit transfer
SI0
Serial data input
INTSIO0 interrupt request
Serial clock
SCK0
Serial clock I/O
Figure 12-1 Serial Interface
Page 133
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO0)
12.2 Control TMP86CS25AFG
12.2 Control
The serial interface is controlled by SIO control registers (SIO0CR1/SIO0CR2). The serial interface status can be determined by reading SIO status register (SIO0SR). The transmit and receive data buffer is controlled by the SIO0CR2. The data buffer is assigned to address 0F90H to 0F97H for SIO in the DBR area, and can continuously transfer up to 8 words (bytes or nibbles) at one time. When the specified number of words has been transferred, a buffer empty (in the transmit mode) or a buffer full (in the receive mode or transmit/receive mode) interrupt (INTSIO0) is generated. When the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 8-bit receive mode and the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, a fixed interval wait can be applied to the serial clock for each word transferred. Four different wait times can be selected with SIO0CR2. SIO Control Register 1
SIO0CR1 (0F98H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 4 SIOM 3 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS
Indicate transfer start / stop
0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 010:
Stop Start Continuously transfer Abort transfer (Automatically cleared after abort) 8-bit transmit mode 4-bit transmit mode 8-bit transmit / receive mode 8-bit receive mode 4-bit receive mode Write only
SIOINH
Continue / abort transfer
SIOM
Transfer mode select
100: 101: 110:
Except the above: Reserved NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 SCK Serial clock select 010 011 100 101 110 111 fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 Reserved External clock ( Input from SCK0 pin ) SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/25 Write only
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Set SIOS to "0" and SIOINH to "1" when setting the transfer mode or serial clock. Note 3: SIO0CR1 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Control Register 2
SIO0CR2 (0F99H) 7 6 5 4 WAIT 3 2 1 BUF 0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
Page 134
TMP86CS25AFG
Always sets "00" except 8-bit transmit / receive mode. 00: WAIT Wait control 01: 10: 11: 000: 001: 010: BUF Number of transfer words (Buffer address in use) 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: Tf = TD(Non wait) Tf = 2TD(Wait) Tf = 4TD(Wait) Tf = 8TD (Wait) 1 word transfer 2 words transfer 3 words transfer 4 words transfer 5 words transfer 6 words transfer 7 words transfer 8 words transfer 0F90H 0F90H ~ 0F91H 0F90H ~ 0F92H 0F90H ~ 0F93H 0F90H ~ 0F94H 0F90H ~ 0F95H 0F90H ~ 0F96H 0F90H ~ 0F97H Write only
Note 1: The lower 4 bits of each buffer are used during 4-bit transfers. Zeros (0) are stored to the upper 4bits when receiving. Note 2: Transmitting starts at the lowest address. Received data are also stored starting from the lowest address to the highest address. ( The first buffer address transmitted is 0F90H ). Note 3: The value to be loaded to BUF is held after transfer is completed. Note 4: SIO0CR2 must be set when the serial interface is stopped (SIOF = 0). Note 5: *: Don't care Note 6: SIO0CR2 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Status Register
SIO0SR (0F99H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 4 3 2 1 0
SIOF SEF
Serial transfer operating status monitor Shift operating status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Transfer terminated Transfer in process Shift operation terminated Shift operation in process
Read only
Note 1: Tf; Frame time, TD; Data transfer time Note 2: After SIOS is cleared to "0", SIOF is cleared to "0" at the termination of transfer or the setting of SIOINH to "1".
(output)
SCK0 output
TD Tf
Figure 12-2 Frame time (Tf) and Data transfer time (TD)
12.3 Serial clock
12.3.1 Clock source
Internal clock or external clock for the source clock is selected by SIO0CR1.
Page 135
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO0)
12.3 Serial clock TMP86CS25AFG
12.3.1.1 Internal clock
Any of six frequencies can be selected. The serial clock is output to the outside on the SCK0 pin. The SCK0 pin goes high when transfer starts. When data writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode or the transmit/receive mode) cannot keep up with the serial clock rate, there is a wait function that automatically stops the serial clock and holds the next shift operation until the read/write processing is completed. Table 12-1 Serial Clock Rate
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Clock fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External Baud Rate 1.91 Kbps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External Clock fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External DV7CK = 1 Baud Rate 1024 bps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode Clock fs/25 External Baud Rate 1024 bps External
Note: 1 Kbit = 1024 bit (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Automatically wait function
SCK0
pin (output)
SO0
pin (output) Written transmit data a
a0
a1
a2
a3 b
b0
b1 c
b2
b3
c0
c1
Figure 12-3 Automatic Wait Function (at 4-bit transmit mode)
12.3.1.2 External clock
An external clock connected to the SCK0 pin is used as the serial clock. In this case, output latch of this port should be set to "1". To ensure shifting, a pulse width of at least 4 machine cycles is required. This pulse is needed for the shift operation to execute certainly. Actually, there is necessary processing time for interrupting, writing, and reading. The minimum pulse is determined by setting the mode and the program. Therfore, maximum transfer frequency will be 488.3K bit/sec (at fc=16MHz).
SCK0
pin (Output)
tSCKL tSCKH
tcyc = 4/fc (In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) 4/fs (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes) tSCKL, tSCKH > 4tcyc
Figure 12-4 External clock pulse width
Page 136
TMP86CS25AFG
12.3.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit, and the trailing edge is used to receive.
12.3.2.1 Leading edge
Transmitted data are shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK0 pin input/ output).
12.3.2.2 Trailing edge
Received data are shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK0 pin input/output).
SCK0 pin
SO0 pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
3210
*321
**32
***3
(a) Leading edge
SCK0 pin
SI0 pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
****
0***
10**
210*
3210
*; Don't care
(b) Trailing edge
Figure 12-5 Shift edge
12.4 Number of bits to transfer
Either 4-bit or 8-bit serial transfer can be selected. When 4-bit serial transfer is selected, only the lower 4 bits of the transmit/receive data buffer register are used. The upper 4 bits are cleared to "0" when receiving. The data is transferred in sequence starting at the least significant bit (LSB).
12.5 Number of words to transfer
Up to 8 words consisting of 4 bits of data (4-bit serial transfer) or 8 bits (8-bit serial transfer) of data can be transferred continuously. The number of words to be transferred can be selected by SIO0CR2. An INTSIO0 interrupt is generated when the specified number of words has been transferred. If the number of words is to be changed during transfer, the serial interface must be stopped before making the change. The number of words can be changed during automatic-wait operation of an internal clock. In this case, the serial interface is not required to be stopped.
Page 137
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO0)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS25AFG
SCK0 pin
SO0 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
INTSIO0 interrupt
(a) 1 word transmit
SCK0 pin
SO0 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO0 interrupt
(b) 3 words transmit
SCK0 pin
SI0 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO0 interrupt
(c) 3 words receive
Figure 12-6 Number of words to transfer (Example: 1word = 4bit)
12.6 Transfer Mode
SIO0CR1 is used to select the transmit, receive, or transmit/receive mode.
12.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes
In these modes, firstly set the SIO control register to the transmit mode, and then write first transmit data (number of transfer words to be transferred) to the data buffer registers (DBR). After the data are written, the transmission is started by setting SIO0CR1 to "1". The data are then output sequentially to the SO pin in synchronous with the serial clock, starting with the least significant bit (LSB). As soon as the LSB has been output, the data are transferred from the data buffer register to the shift register. When the final data bit has been transferred and the data buffer register is empty, an INTSIO0 (Buffer empty) interrupt is generated to request the next transmitted data. When the internal clock is used, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated if the next transmitted data are not loaded to the data buffer register by the time the number of data words specified with the SIO0CR2 has been transmitted. Writing even one word of data cancels the automatic-wait; therefore, when transmitting two or more words, always write the next word before transmission of the previous word is completed.
Note:Automatic waits are also canceled by writing to a DBR not being used as a transmit data buffer register; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications. For example, when 3 words are transmitted, do not use the DBR of the remained 5 words.
When an external clock is used, the data must be written to the data buffer register before shifting next data. Thus, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay time from the generation of the interrupt request to writing of the data to the data buffer register by the interrupt service program. The transmission is ended by clearing SIO0CR1 to "0" or setting SIO0CR1 to "1" in buffer empty interrupt service program. Page 138
TMP86CS25AFG
SIO0CR1 is cleared, the operation will end after all bits of words are transmitted. That the transmission has ended can be determined from the status of SIO0SR because SIO0SR is cleared to "0" when a transfer is completed. When SIO0CR1 is set, the transmission is immediately ended and SIO0SR is cleared to "0". When an external clock is used, it is also necessary to clear SIO0CR1 to "0" before shifting the next data; If SIO0CR1 is not cleared before shift out, dummy data will be transmitted and the operation will end. If it is necessary to change the number of words, SIO0CR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIO0CR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIO0SR has been cleared to "0".
Clear SIOS
SIO0CR1
SIO0SR
SIO0SR
SCK0 pin (Output) SO0 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO0 interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 12-7 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
Clear SIOS
SIO0CR1
SIO0SR
SIO0SR
SCK0 pin (Input) SO0 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO0 interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 12-8 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, External clock)
Page 139
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO0)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS25AFG
SCK0 pin
SIO0SR
SO0 pin
MSB of last word
tSODH = min 3.5/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 3.5/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 12-9 Transmiiied Data Hold Time at End of Transfer 12.6.2 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes
After setting the control registers to the receive mode, set SIO0CR1 to "1" to enable receiving. The data are then transferred to the shift register via the SI pin in synchronous with the serial clock. When one word of data has been received, it is transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register (DBR). When the number of words specified with the SIO0CR2 has been received, an INTSIO0 (Buffer full) interrupt is generated to request that these data be read out. The data are then read from the data buffer registers by the interrupt service program. When the internal clock is used, and the previous data are not read from the data buffer register before the next data are received, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated until the data are read. A wait will not be initiated if even one data word has been read.
Note:Waits are also canceled by reading a DBR not being used as a received data buffer register is read; therefore, during SIO0 do not use such DBR for other applications.
When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, the previous data are read before the next data are transferred to the data buffer register. If the previous data have not been read, the next data will not be transferred to the data buffer register and the receiving of any more data will be canceled. When an external clock is used, the maximum transfer speed is determined by the delay between the time when the interrupt request is generated and when the data received have been read. The receiving is ended by clearing SIO0CR1 to "0" or setting SIO0CR1 to "1" in buffer full interrupt service program. When SIO0CR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIO0CR1 cleared, the receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been received. That the receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIO0SR. SIO0SR is cleared to "0" when the receiving is ended. After confirmed the receiving termination, the final receiving data is read. When SIO0CR1 is set, the receiving is immediately ended and SIO0SR is cleared to "0". (The received data is ignored, and it is not required to be read out.) If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIO0CR1 should be cleared to "0" then SIO0CR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIO0SR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of data receiving, SIO0CR2 must be rewritten before the received data is read out.
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIO0CR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Page 140
TMP86CS25AFG
Clear SIOS
SIO0CR1
SIO0SR
SIO0SR
SCK0 pin (Output) SI0 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO0 Interrupt
DBR
a
Read out
b
Read out
Figure 12-10 Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock) 12.6.3 8-bit transfer / receive mode
After setting the SIO control register to the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, write the data to be transmitted first to the data buffer registers (DBR). After that, enable the transmit/receive by setting SIO0CR1 to "1". When transmitting, the data are output from the SO0 pin at leading edges of the serial clock. When receiving, the data are input to the SI0 pin at the trailing edges of the serial clock. When the all receive is enabled, 8-bit data are transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register. An INTSIO0 interrupt is generated when the number of data words specified with the SIO0CR2 has been transferred. Usually, read the receive data from the buffer register in the interrupt service. The data buffer register is used for both transmitting and receiving; therefore, always write the data to be transmitted after reading the all received data. When the internal clock is used, a wait is initiated until the received data are read and the next transfer data are written. A wait will not be initiated if even one transfer data word has been written. When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, it is necessary to read the received data and write the data to be transmitted next before starting the next shift operation. When an external clock is used, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay between generation of an interrupt request and the received data are read and the data to be transmitted next are written. The transmit/receive operation is ended by clearing SIO0CR1 to "0" or setting SIO0CR1 to "1" in INTSIO0 interrupt service program. When SIO0CR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIO0CR1 cleared, the transmitting/receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been transmitted. That the transmitting/receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIO0SR. SIO0SR is cleared to "0" when the transmitting/receiving is ended. When SIO0CR1 is set, the transmit/receive operation is immediately ended and SIO0SR is cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIO0CR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIO0CR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIO0SR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of transmit/receive operation, SIO0CR2 must be rewritten before reading and writing of the receive/transmit data.
Page 141
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO0)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS25AFG
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIO0CR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Clear SIOS
SIO0CR1
SIO0SR
SIO0SR
SCK0 pin (output) SO0 pin
a0 c0
a1 c1
a2 c2
a3 c3
a4 c4
a5 c5
a6 c6
a7 c7
b0 d0
b1 d1
b2 d2
b3 d3
b4 d4
b5 d5
b6 d6
b7 d7
SI0 pin
INTSIO0 interrupt
DBR
a
Write (a) Read out (c)
c
b
Write (b)
d
Read out (d)
Figure 12-11 Transfer / Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
SCK0 pin
SIO0SR
SO0 pin
Bit 6
Bit 7 of last word
tSODH = min 4/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 4/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 12-12 Transmitted Data Hold Time at End of Transfer / Receive
Page 142
TMP86CS25AFG
13. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
The TMP86CS25AFG has a clocked-synchronous 8-bit serial interface. Serial interface has an 8-byte transmit and receive data buffer that can automatically and continuously transfer up to 64 bits of data. Serial interface is connected to outside peripherl devices via SO1, SI1, SCK1 port.
13.1 Configuration
SIO control / status register
SIO1SR
SIO1CR1
SIO1CR2
CPU
Control circuit
Buffer control circuit Shift register Shift clock
Transmit and receive data buffer (8 bytes in DBR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO1
Serial data output 8-bit transfer 4-bit transfer
SI1
Serial data input
INTSIO1 interrupt request
Serial clock
SCK1
Serial clock I/O
Figure 13-1 Serial Interface
Page 143
13. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
13.2 Control TMP86CS25AFG
13.2 Control
The serial interface is controlled by SIO control registers (SIO1CR1/SIO1CR2). The serial interface status can be determined by reading SIO status register (SIO1SR). The transmit and receive data buffer is controlled by the SIO1CR2. The data buffer is assigned to address 0FA0H to 0FA7H for SIO in the DBR area, and can continuously transfer up to 8 words (bytes or nibbles) at one time. When the specified number of words has been transferred, a buffer empty (in the transmit mode) or a buffer full (in the receive mode or transmit/receive mode) interrupt (INTSIO1) is generated. When the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 8-bit receive mode and the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, a fixed interval wait can be applied to the serial clock for each word transferred. Four different wait times can be selected with SIO1CR2. SIO Control Register 1
SIO1CR1 (0FA8H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 4 SIOM 3 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS
Indicate transfer start / stop
0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 010:
Stop Start Continuously transfer Abort transfer (Automatically cleared after abort) 8-bit transmit mode 4-bit transmit mode 8-bit transmit / receive mode 8-bit receive mode 4-bit receive mode Write only
SIOINH
Continue / abort transfer
SIOM
Transfer mode select
100: 101: 110:
Except the above: Reserved NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 SCK Serial clock select 010 011 100 101 110 111 fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 Reserved External clock ( Input from SCK1 pin ) SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/25 Write only
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Set SIOS to "0" and SIOINH to "1" when setting the transfer mode or serial clock. Note 3: SIO1CR1 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Control Register 2
SIO1CR2 (0FA9H) 7 6 5 4 WAIT 3 2 1 BUF 0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
Page 144
TMP86CS25AFG
Always sets "00" except 8-bit transmit / receive mode. 00: WAIT Wait control 01: 10: 11: 000: 001: 010: BUF Number of transfer words (Buffer address in use) 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: Tf = TD(Non wait) Tf = 2TD(Wait) Tf = 4TD(Wait) Tf = 8TD (Wait) 1 word transfer 2 words transfer 3 words transfer 4 words transfer 5 words transfer 6 words transfer 7 words transfer 8 words transfer 0FA0H 0FA0H ~ 0FA1H 0FA0H ~ 0FA2H 0FA0H ~ 0FA3H 0FA0H ~ 0FA4H 0FA0H ~ 0FA5H 0FA0H ~ 0FA6H 0FA0H ~ 0FA7H Write only
Note 1: The lower 4 bits of each buffer are used during 4-bit transfers. Zeros (0) are stored to the upper 4bits when receiving. Note 2: Transmitting starts at the lowest address. Received data are also stored starting from the lowest address to the highest address. ( The first buffer address transmitted is 0FA0H ). Note 3: The value to be loaded to BUF is held after transfer is completed. Note 4: SIO1CR2 must be set when the serial interface is stopped (SIOF = 0). Note 5: *: Don't care Note 6: SIO1CR2 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Status Register
SIO1SR (0FA9H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 4 3 2 1 0
SIOF SEF
Serial transfer operating status monitor Shift operating status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Transfer terminated Transfer in process Shift operation terminated Shift operation in process
Read only
Note 1: Tf; Frame time, TD; Data transfer time Note 2: After SIOS is cleared to "0", SIOF is cleared to "0" at the termination of transfer or the setting of SIOINH to "1".
(output)
SCK1 output
TD Tf
Figure 13-2 Frame time (Tf) and Data transfer time (TD)
13.3 Serial clock
13.3.1 Clock source
Internal clock or external clock for the source clock is selected by SIO1CR1.
Page 145
13. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
13.3 Serial clock TMP86CS25AFG
13.3.1.1 Internal clock
Any of six frequencies can be selected. The serial clock is output to the outside on the SCK1 pin. The SCK1 pin goes high when transfer starts. When data writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode or the transmit/receive mode) cannot keep up with the serial clock rate, there is a wait function that automatically stops the serial clock and holds the next shift operation until the read/write processing is completed. Table 13-1 Serial Clock Rate
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Clock fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External Baud Rate 1.91 Kbps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External Clock fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External DV7CK = 1 Baud Rate 1024 bps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode Clock fs/25 External Baud Rate 1024 bps External
Note: 1 Kbit = 1024 bit (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Automatically wait function
SCK1
pin (output)
SO1
pin (output) Written transmit data a
a0
a1
a2
a3 b
b0
b1 c
b2
b3
c0
c1
Figure 13-3 Automatic Wait Function (at 4-bit transmit mode)
13.3.1.2 External clock
An external clock connected to the SCK1 pin is used as the serial clock. In this case, output latch of this port should be set to "1". To ensure shifting, a pulse width of at least 4 machine cycles is required. This pulse is needed for the shift operation to execute certainly. Actually, there is necessary processing time for interrupting, writing, and reading. The minimum pulse is determined by setting the mode and the program. Therfore, maximum transfer frequency will be 488.3K bit/sec (at fc=16MHz).
SCK1
pin (Output)
tSCKL tSCKH
tcyc = 4/fc (In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) 4/fs (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes) tSCKL, tSCKH > 4tcyc
Figure 13-4 External clock pulse width
Page 146
TMP86CS25AFG
13.3.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit, and the trailing edge is used to receive.
13.3.2.1 Leading edge
Transmitted data are shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK1 pin input/ output).
13.3.2.2 Trailing edge
Received data are shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK1 pin input/output).
SCK1 pin
SO1 pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
3210
*321
**32
***3
(a) Leading edge
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
****
0***
10**
210*
3210
*; Don't care
(b) Trailing edge
Figure 13-5 Shift edge
13.4 Number of bits to transfer
Either 4-bit or 8-bit serial transfer can be selected. When 4-bit serial transfer is selected, only the lower 4 bits of the transmit/receive data buffer register are used. The upper 4 bits are cleared to "0" when receiving. The data is transferred in sequence starting at the least significant bit (LSB).
13.5 Number of words to transfer
Up to 8 words consisting of 4 bits of data (4-bit serial transfer) or 8 bits (8-bit serial transfer) of data can be transferred continuously. The number of words to be transferred can be selected by SIO1CR2. An INTSIO1 interrupt is generated when the specified number of words has been transferred. If the number of words is to be changed during transfer, the serial interface must be stopped before making the change. The number of words can be changed during automatic-wait operation of an internal clock. In this case, the serial interface is not required to be stopped.
Page 147
13. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
13.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS25AFG
SCK1 pin
SO1 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
INTSIO1 interrupt
(a) 1 word transmit
SCK1 pin
SO1 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO1 interrupt
(b) 3 words transmit
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO1 interrupt
(c) 3 words receive
Figure 13-6 Number of words to transfer (Example: 1word = 4bit)
13.6 Transfer Mode
SIO1CR1 is used to select the transmit, receive, or transmit/receive mode.
13.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes
In these modes, firstly set the SIO control register to the transmit mode, and then write first transmit data (number of transfer words to be transferred) to the data buffer registers (DBR). After the data are written, the transmission is started by setting SIO1CR1 to "1". The data are then output sequentially to the SO pin in synchronous with the serial clock, starting with the least significant bit (LSB). As soon as the LSB has been output, the data are transferred from the data buffer register to the shift register. When the final data bit has been transferred and the data buffer register is empty, an INTSIO1 (Buffer empty) interrupt is generated to request the next transmitted data. When the internal clock is used, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated if the next transmitted data are not loaded to the data buffer register by the time the number of data words specified with the SIO1CR2 has been transmitted. Writing even one word of data cancels the automatic-wait; therefore, when transmitting two or more words, always write the next word before transmission of the previous word is completed.
Note:Automatic waits are also canceled by writing to a DBR not being used as a transmit data buffer register; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications. For example, when 3 words are transmitted, do not use the DBR of the remained 5 words.
When an external clock is used, the data must be written to the data buffer register before shifting next data. Thus, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay time from the generation of the interrupt request to writing of the data to the data buffer register by the interrupt service program. The transmission is ended by clearing SIO1CR1 to "0" or setting SIO1CR1 to "1" in buffer empty interrupt service program. Page 148
TMP86CS25AFG
SIO1CR1 is cleared, the operation will end after all bits of words are transmitted. That the transmission has ended can be determined from the status of SIO1SR because SIO1SR is cleared to "0" when a transfer is completed. When SIO1CR1 is set, the transmission is immediately ended and SIO1SR is cleared to "0". When an external clock is used, it is also necessary to clear SIO1CR1 to "0" before shifting the next data; If SIO1CR1 is not cleared before shift out, dummy data will be transmitted and the operation will end. If it is necessary to change the number of words, SIO1CR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIO1CR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIO1SR has been cleared to "0".
Clear SIOS
SIO1CR1
SIO1SR
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin (Output) SO1 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO1 interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 13-7 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
Clear SIOS
SIO1CR1
SIO1SR
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin (Input) SO1 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO1 interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 13-8 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, External clock)
Page 149
13. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
13.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS25AFG
SCK1 pin
SIO1SR
SO1 pin
MSB of last word
tSODH = min 3.5/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 3.5/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 13-9 Transmiiied Data Hold Time at End of Transfer 13.6.2 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes
After setting the control registers to the receive mode, set SIO1CR1 to "1" to enable receiving. The data are then transferred to the shift register via the SI pin in synchronous with the serial clock. When one word of data has been received, it is transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register (DBR). When the number of words specified with the SIO1CR2 has been received, an INTSIO1 (Buffer full) interrupt is generated to request that these data be read out. The data are then read from the data buffer registers by the interrupt service program. When the internal clock is used, and the previous data are not read from the data buffer register before the next data are received, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated until the data are read. A wait will not be initiated if even one data word has been read.
Note:Waits are also canceled by reading a DBR not being used as a received data buffer register is read; therefore, during SIO1 do not use such DBR for other applications.
When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, the previous data are read before the next data are transferred to the data buffer register. If the previous data have not been read, the next data will not be transferred to the data buffer register and the receiving of any more data will be canceled. When an external clock is used, the maximum transfer speed is determined by the delay between the time when the interrupt request is generated and when the data received have been read. The receiving is ended by clearing SIO1CR1 to "0" or setting SIO1CR1 to "1" in buffer full interrupt service program. When SIO1CR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIO1CR1 cleared, the receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been received. That the receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIO1SR. SIO1SR is cleared to "0" when the receiving is ended. After confirmed the receiving termination, the final receiving data is read. When SIO1CR1 is set, the receiving is immediately ended and SIO1SR is cleared to "0". (The received data is ignored, and it is not required to be read out.) If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIO1CR1 should be cleared to "0" then SIO1CR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIO1SR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of data receiving, SIO1CR2 must be rewritten before the received data is read out.
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIO1CR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Page 150
TMP86CS25AFG
Clear SIOS
SIO1CR1
SIO1SR
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin (Output) SI1 pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO1 Interrupt
DBR
a
Read out
b
Read out
Figure 13-10 Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock) 13.6.3 8-bit transfer / receive mode
After setting the SIO control register to the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, write the data to be transmitted first to the data buffer registers (DBR). After that, enable the transmit/receive by setting SIO1CR1 to "1". When transmitting, the data are output from the SO1 pin at leading edges of the serial clock. When receiving, the data are input to the SI1 pin at the trailing edges of the serial clock. When the all receive is enabled, 8-bit data are transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register. An INTSIO1 interrupt is generated when the number of data words specified with the SIO1CR2 has been transferred. Usually, read the receive data from the buffer register in the interrupt service. The data buffer register is used for both transmitting and receiving; therefore, always write the data to be transmitted after reading the all received data. When the internal clock is used, a wait is initiated until the received data are read and the next transfer data are written. A wait will not be initiated if even one transfer data word has been written. When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, it is necessary to read the received data and write the data to be transmitted next before starting the next shift operation. When an external clock is used, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay between generation of an interrupt request and the received data are read and the data to be transmitted next are written. The transmit/receive operation is ended by clearing SIO1CR1 to "0" or setting SIO1CR1 to "1" in INTSIO1 interrupt service program. When SIO1CR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIO1CR1 cleared, the transmitting/receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been transmitted. That the transmitting/receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIO1SR. SIO1SR is cleared to "0" when the transmitting/receiving is ended. When SIO1CR1 is set, the transmit/receive operation is immediately ended and SIO1SR is cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIO1CR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIO1CR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIO1SR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of transmit/receive operation, SIO1CR2 must be rewritten before reading and writing of the receive/transmit data.
Page 151
13. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
13.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS25AFG
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIO1CR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Clear SIOS
SIO1CR1
SIO1SR
SIO1SR
SCK1 pin (output) SO1 pin
a0 c0
a1 c1
a2 c2
a3 c3
a4 c4
a5 c5
a6 c6
a7 c7
b0 d0
b1 d1
b2 d2
b3 d3
b4 d4
b5 d5
b6 d6
b7 d7
SI1 pin
INTSIO1 interrupt
DBR
a
Write (a) Read out (c)
c
b
Write (b)
d
Read out (d)
Figure 13-11 Transfer / Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
SCK1 pin
SIO1SR
SO1 pin
Bit 6
Bit 7 of last word
tSODH = min 4/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 4/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 13-12 Transmitted Data Hold Time at End of Transfer / Receive
Page 152
TMP86CS25AFG
14. 8-Bit AD Converter (ADC)
The TMP86CS25AFG have a 8-bit successive approximation type AD converter.
14.1 Configuration
The circuit configuration of the 8-bit AD converter is shown in Figure 14-1. It consists of control registers ADCCR1 and ADCCR2, converted value registers ADCDR1 and ADCDR2, a DA converter, a sample-and-hold circuit, a comparator, and a successive comparison circuit.
DA converter
VAREF VSS
R/2
VDD
R Reference voltage
R/2
Analog input multiplexer
Sample hold circuit
AIN0
0 to
Y 8 Analog comparator
AIN7
n
Successive approximate circuit
S EN IREFON 4 SAIN ADRS AINDS
Shift clock Control circuit 3 ACK ADCCR2 8 ADCDR1
INTADC interrupt
EOCF ADCDR2
ADBF
ADCCR1
AD converter control register 1,2
AD conversion result register1,2
Figure 14-1 8-bit AD Converter (ADC)
Page 153
14. 8-Bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.1 Configuration TMP86CS25AFG
14.2 Control
The AD converter consists of the following four registers: 1. AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) This register selects the analog channels in which to perform AD conversion and controls the AD converter as it starts operating. 2. AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) This register selects the AD conversion time and controls the connection of the DA converter (ladder resistor network). 3. AD converted value register (ADCDR1) This register is used to store the digital value after being converted by the AD converter. 4. AD converted value register (ADCDR2) This register monitors the operating status of the AD converter. AD Converter Control Register 1
ADCCR1 (000EH) 7 ADRS 6 "0" 5 "1" 4 AINDS 3 2 SAIN 1 0 (Initial value: 0001 0000)
ADRS AINDS
AD conversion start Analog input control
0: 1: 0: 1: 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111:
- Start Analog input enable Analog input disable AIN0 AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 AIN4 AIN5 AIN6 AIN7 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
R/W
SAIN
Analog input channel select
Note 1: Select analog input when AD converter stops (ADCDR2 = "0"). Note 2: When the analog input is all use disabling, the ADCCR1 should be set to "1". Note 3: During conversion, do not perform output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins. And port near to analog input, do not input intense signaling of change. Note 4: The ADRS is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion. Note 5: Do not set ADCCR1 newly again during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCR1 newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine). Note 6: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therefore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR1 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode. Note 7: Always set bit 5 in ADCCR1 to "1" and set bit 6 in ADCCR1 to "0".
Page 154
TMP86CS25AFG
AD Converter Control Register 2
ADCCR2 (000FH) 7 6 5 IREFON 4 "1" 3 2 ACK 1 0 "0" (Initial value: **0* 000*)
IREFON
DA converter (ladder resistor) connection control
0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Connected only during AD conversion Always connected 39/fc Reserved 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc Reserved
R/W
ACK
AD conversion time select
R/W
Note 1: Always set bit 0 in ADCCR2 to "0" and set bit 4 in ADCCR2 to "1". Note 2: When a read instruction for ADCCR2, bit 6 to 7 in ADCCR2 read in as undefined data. Note 3: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therefore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR2 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Table 14-1 Conversion Time according to ACK Setting and Frequency
Condition ACK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Conbersion time` 39/fc 16MHz 8MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 19.5 s Reserved 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Reserved 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 10MHz 5 MHz 2.5 MHz 15.6 s
Note 1: Settings for "-" in the above table are inhibited. Note 2: Set conversion time by Analog Reference Voltage (VAREF) as follows.
VAREF = 4.5 to 5.5 V VAREF = 2.7 to 5.5 V VAREF = 1.8 to 5.5 V (15.6 s or more) (31.2 s or more) (124.8 s or more)
AD Conversion Result Register
ADCDR1 (0020H) 7 AD07 6 AD06 5 AD05 4 AD04 3 AD03 2 AD02 1 AD01 0 AD00 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
AD Conversion Result Register
ADCDR2 (0021H) 7 6 5 EOCF EOCF ADBF 4 ADBF 0: Before or during conversion 1: Conversion completed 0: During stop of AD conversion 1: During AD conversion 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **00 ****)
AD conversion end flag AD conversion busy flag
Read only
Note 1: The ADCDR2 is cleared to "0" when reading the ADCDR1. Therefore, the AD conversion result should be read to ADCDR2 more first than ADCDR1. Note 2: ADCDR2 is set to "1" when AD conversion starts and cleared to "0" when the AD conversion is finished. It also is cleared upon entering STOP or SLOW mode. Note 3: If a read instruction is executed for ADCDR2, read data of bits 7, 6 and 3 to 0 are unstable.
Page 155
14. 8-Bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.3 Function TMP86CS25AFG
14.3 Function
14.3.1 AD Conveter Operation
When ADCCR1 is set to "1", AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is thereby started. After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to "1", the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. ADCCR1 is automatically cleared after AD conversion has started. Do not set ADCCR1 newly again (restart) during AD conversion. Before setting ADRS newly again, check ADCDR to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine).
AD conversion start ADCCR1 AD conversion start
ADCDR2
ADCDR1 status
Indeterminate
First conversion result
Second conversion result EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
ADCDR2
INTADC interrupt Conversion result read Conversion result read
Reading ADCDR1
Reading ADCDR2
Figure 14-2 AD Converter Operation 14.3.2 AD Converter Operation
1. Set up the AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) as follows: * Choose the channel to AD convert using AD input channel select (SAIN). * Specify analog input enable for analog input control (AINDS). 2. Set up the AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) as follows: * Set the AD conversion time using AD conversion time (ACK). For details on how to set the conversion time, refer to Table 14-1. * Choose IREFON for DA converter control. 3. After setting up 1. and 2. above, set AD conversion start (ADRS) of AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) to "1". 4. After an elapse of the specified AD conversion time, the AD converted value is stored in AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) and the AD conversion finished flag (EOCF) of AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) is set to "1", upon which time AD conversion interrupt INTADC is generated. 5. EOCF is cleared to "0" by a read of the conversion result. However, if reconverted before a register read, although EOCF is cleared the previous conversion result is retained until the next conversion is completed. Page 156
TMP86CS25AFG
Example :After selecting the conversion time of 19.5 s at 16 MHz and the analog input channel AIN3 pin, perform AD conversion once. After checking EOCF, read the converted value and store the 8-bit data in address 009FH on RAM.
; AIN SELECT : : LD LD ; AD CONVERT START SET SLOOP: TEST JRS ; RESULT DATA READ LD LD A, (ADCDR1) (9FH), A (ADCCR1). 7 (ADCDR2). 5 T, SLOOP ; ADRS = 1 ; EOCF = 1 ? : : (ADCCR1), 00100011B (ADCCR2), 11011000B ; Before setting the AD converter register, set each port register suitably (For detail, see chapter of I/O port.) ; Select AIN3 ; Select conversion time (312/fc) and operation mode
14.3.3 STOP and SLOW Mode during AD Conversion
When the STOP or SLOW mode is entered forcibly during AD conversion, the AD convert operation is suspended and the AD converter is initialized (ADCCR1 and ADCCR2 are initialized to initial value.). Also, the conversion result is indeterminate. (Conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read the conversion results before entering STOP or SLOW mode.) When restored from STOP or SLOW mode, AD conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessary to restart AD conversion. Note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing into the analog reference voltage.
Page 157
14. 8-Bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.3 Function TMP86CS25AFG
14.3.4 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
The analog input voltage is corresponded to the 8-bit digital value converted by the AD as shown in Figure 14-3.
AD conversion result FFH FEH FDH
03H 02H 01H x 0 1 2 3 253 254 Analog input voltage 255 256
VAREF VSS
256
Figure 14-3 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result (typ.)
Page 158
TMP86CS25AFG
14.4 Precautions about AD Converter
14.4.1 Analog input pin voltage range
Make sure the analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are used at voltages within VSS below VAREF. If any voltage outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain. The other analog input pins also are affected by that.
14.4.2 Analog input shared pins
The analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are shared with input/output ports. When using any of the analog inputs to execute AD conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. This is necessary to prevent the accuracy of AD conversion from degrading. Not only these analog input shared pins, some other pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/output to and from adjacent pins.
14.4.3 Noise countermeasure
The internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in Figure 14-4. The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to noise. Therefore, make sure the output impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 k or less. Toshiba also recommends attaching a capacitor external to the chip.
AINx
Internal resistance
5 k (typ)
Analog comparator
Allowable signal source impedance
5 k (max)
Internal capacitance
C = 22 pF (typ.)
DA converter
Note) i = 7~0
Figure 14-4 Analog Input Equivalent Circuit and Example of Input Pin Processing
Page 159
14. 8-Bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.4 Precautions about AD Converter TMP86CS25AFG
Page 160
TMP86CS25AFG
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
In the TMP86CS25AFG, the STOP mode is released by not only P20(INT5/STOP) pin but also four (STOP2 to STOP5) pins. When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the STOP pin needs to be used. In details, refer to the following section " 15.2 Control ".
15.1 Configuration
INT5 STOP mode release signal (1: Release) STOP
STOP2 STOP3 STOP4 STOP5
STOPCR (0F9AH)
Figure 15-1 Key-on Wakeup Circuit
15.2 Control
STOP2 to STOP5 pins can controlled by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR). It can be configured as enable/disable in 1-bit unit. When those pins are used for STOP mode release, configure corresponding I/O pins to input mode by I/O port register beforehand. Key-on Wakeup Control Register
STOPCR (0F9AH) 7 STOP5 6 STOP4 5 STOP3 4 STOP2 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
STOP5 STOP4 STOP3 STOP2
0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable
STOP5 STOP4 STOP3 STOP2
STOP mode released by STOP5 STOP mode released by STOP4 STOP mode released by STOP3 STOP mode released by STOP2
Write only Write only Write only Write only
15.3 Function
Stop mode can be entered by setting up the System Control Register (SYSCR1), and can be exited by detecting the "L" level on STOP2 to STOP5 pins, which are enabled by STOPCR, for releasing STOP mode (Note1).
Page 161
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
15.3 Function TMP86CS25AFG
Also, each level of the STOP2 to STOP5 pins can be confirmed by reading corresponding I/O port data register, check all STOP2 to STOP5 pins "H" that is enabled by STOPCR before the STOP mode is startd (Note2).
Note 1: When the STOP mode released by the edge release mode (SYSCR1 = "0"), inhibit input from STOP2 to STOP5 pins by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) or must be set "H" level into STOP2 to STOP5 pins that are available input during STOP mode. Note 2: When the STOP pin input is high or STOP2 to STOP5 pins inputwhich is enabled by STOPCR is low, executing an instruction which starts STOP mode will not place in STOP mode but instead will immediately start the release sequence (Warm up). Note 3: STOP pin doesn't have the control register such as STOPCR, so when STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, STOP pin also should be used as STOP mode release function. Note 4: In STOP mode, Key-on Wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing STOP mode) by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) may genarate the penetration current, so the said pin must be disabled AD conversion input (analog voltage input). Note 5: When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the level of STOP pin should hold "L" level (Figure 15-2).
a) STOP
b) In case of STOP2 to STOP5
STOP pin STOP mode Release STOP mode
STOP pin "L"
STOP2 pin
STOP mode
Release STOP mode
Figure 15-2 Priority of STOP pin and STOP2 to STOP5 pins
Table 15-1 Release level (edge) of STOP mode
Release level (edge) Pin name SYSCR1="1" (Note2) "H" level "L" level "L" level "L" level "L" level SYSCR1="0" Rising edge Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1)
STOP
STOP2 STOP3 STOP4 STOP5
Page 162
TMP86CS25AFG
16. LCD Driver
The TMP86CS25AFG incorporates a driver to directly drive the liquid crystal display (LCD) and its control circuit. The connecting pins with the LCD are as shown below: 1. Segment output pin: 2. Segment output/ I/O port pin (shared): 3. Common output pin: 4. Common output I/O port pin (shared): 40 pins (SEG39 to SEG0) 20 pins (SEG59 to SEG40) 5 pins (COM4 to COM0) 11 pins (COM15 to COM5)
In addition, C0, C1, V1, V2, V3 and V4 are provided as the LCD drive booster circuit pins. The following three types of LCD can be driven directly: 1. 1/4 duty LCD: Maximum 240 pixels (60 segments x 4 digits) 2. 1/8 duty LCD: Maximum 480 pixels (60 segments x 8 digits) 3. 1/16 duty LCD: Maximum 960 pixels (60 segments x 16 digits)
16.1 Configuration of LCD Driver
LCD Driver Control Register 2 LCDCTL2
VFSEL2 VFSEL1 VFSEL0
fc fs Dedicated divider
LCD Driver Control Register 1 LCDCTL1 DUTY REFV
DUTY5 DUTY4 DUTY3 BRES
DBR data area
DISST
Duty control Branking control Low voltage booster circuit Common driver
Timing gen. circuit
Display data select circuit
Display data buffer register Segment driver
C0
C1
V1
V2 V3
V4
COM0
COM15
SEG0
SEG39 SEG40
SEG59
Figure 16-1 LCD Driver Block Diagram
Note: The LCD driver circuit has a built-in dedicated divider circuit. Thus, during use of the tool, LCD outputting is not stopped by debugger break processing.
Page 163
16. LCD Driver
16.1 Configuration of LCD Driver TMP86CS25AFG
16.2 Controlling LCD Driver
The LCD driver is controlled by the LCD control register 1 (LCDCTL1) and the LCD control register 2 (LCDCTL2). The display of the LCD driver is enabled by DISST. LCD Control Register 1
LCDCTL1 (0027H) 7 DUTY7 6 REFV 5 DUTY5 4 DUTY4 3 DUTY3 2 BRES 1 0 DISST (Initial value: 0000 00*0)
DUTY7 DUYU5 DUTY4 DUTY3
Select duty.
0***: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
Reserved 1/4 duty Reserved 1/8 duty Reserved Reserved Reserved 1/16 duty Reserved V4 VDD (Note 4) VDD < V4 5.5 V Booster circuit disable Booster circuit enable (Note 5) LCD display blanking LCD display enable
R/W
REFV BRES DISST
Sets LCD reference voltage. Sets booster circuit. Controls LCD display.
Note 1: After reset, LCDCTL1 are set to "0000" (Initial value: reserved). Set the duty as appropriate for LCD panel. Note 2: Switch LCDCTL1 according to VDD. If it is not set appropriately, an overcurrent may flow causing damage to the device. Caution is especially required when VDD is battery-driven. Note 3: If LCDCTL1 is set to "0" (LCD display blanking), all SEG/COM pins become VSS level. Note 4: When LCDCTL1 for the LCD reference voltage is set to "0", always make sure the reference power supply is entered from the V4 pin. In this case, input voltage from V4 pin should be kept within 2.7 V V4 VDD. Note 5: When LCD is used, always set LCDCTL1 to "1". Note 6: Reserved: Not to be set.
LCD Control Register 2
LCDCTL2 (0028H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 VFSEL2 1 VFSEL1 0 VFSEL0 (Initial value: **** *011)
000: 001: VFSEL Selects base frequency for frame frequency. 010: 011: 1**:
fc/29 (at 16 MHz) fc/28 (at 8 MHz) fc/27 (at 6 MHz) fc/26 (at 2 MHz) fs (at 32.768 kHz) R/W
Note: Set the LCD control register 2 according to operating frequency. For details of the actual frame frequency, see Table 16-1
Page 164
TMP86CS25AFG
16.2.1 Frame frequency
The frame frequency is set depending on the driving method and the base frequency as shown in Table 16-1. The base frequency is selected with LCDCTL2 depending on the basic clock frequencies fc and fs to be used. Table 16-1 Frame Frequency Settings
Frame frequency [Hz] VFSEL Base frequency [Hz] 1/4 duty 1/8 duty 1/16 duty
000
fc ----9 2
(fc = 16 MHz)
fc -----------------------2 9 84 4
93
fc -----------------------2 9 42 8
93
fc --------------------------2 9 21 16
93
001
fc ----8 2
(fc = 8 MHz)
fc -----------------------2 8 84 4
93
fc -----------------------2 8 42 8
93
fc --------------------------2 8 21 16
93
010
fc ----7 2
(fc = 4 MHz)
fc -----------------------2 7 84 4
93
fc -----------------------2 7 42 8
93
fc --------------------------2 7 21 16
93
011
fc ----6 2
(fc = 2 MHz) fs
fc -----------------------2 6 84 4
93
fc -----------------------2 6 42 8
93
fc --------------------------2 6 21 16
93
1** (fs = 32.768 kHz)
fs ------------84 4
97.5
fs ------------42 8
97.5
fs ----------------21 16
97.5
Note 1: fc ; High-frequency clock frequency [Hz], fs ; Low-frequency clock frequency [Hz] Note 2: Although this product is guaranteed to operate at fc = 1.32 [MHz] or less is not recommended for LCD display as the frame frequency becomes 61 [Hz] or less.
16.3 LCD Booster Circuit
The TMP86CS25AFG can boost (divide) the externally-supplied reference voltage using the built-in booster circuit as a power supply for driving the LCD. When V1 pin is the reference voltage, the inputted reference voltage is boosted by two times (V2), 3 times (V3) and 4 times (V4) to generate a voltage for a segment/common signal. When V2 pin is the reference voltage, the inputted reference voltage is divided/boosted by 1/2 time (V1), 3/2 times (V3) and two times (V4). Likewise, when V3 pin or V4 pin is the reference, the inputted reference voltage is boosted/ divided and the voltage ratio is V1 x 4 = V2 x 2 = V3 x (4/3) = V4. As this circuit uses a 4-times boosting method, the bias ratio is 1/4 only.
Note 1: When the reference pin is other than V1 pin, a condenser is required between V1 pin and GND. Note 2: When LCDCTL1 is set to "0", input voltage from V4 pin should be kept within 2.7 V V4 VDD.
Page 165
16. LCD Driver
16.3 LCD Booster Circuit TMP86CS25AFG
16.4 Methods of Connecting LCD Booster Circuit
16.4.1 Method of connecting booster circuit by using a regulator
If VDD is not stable because it is battery-driven, etc., we recommend a connection method using a regulator as shown below in order to preserve the quality of display.
VDD C1 C0 V4 V3 V2 V1 C C C C
VDD C1 C0 V4 V3 V2 V1 C C C C C
SEG COM
SEG COM
VSS
Regulator
VSS
Regulator
(a) Example of voltage step-up operation by a regulator (relative V1 pin)
(b) Example of voltage step-up operation by a regulator (relative V2 pin) Note: C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
Note: For use with VDD V4 (LCDCTL1 = 0), always make sure the reference power supply is entered from V4.
Figure 16-2 Method of Connecting Booster Circuit by Using a Regulator 16.4.2 Method of connecting booster circuit without using a regulator
If stable VDD supply is achieved (VDD V4), the booster circuit can be connected without using a regulator as shown below. In this case, set LCDCTL1 to "0" and make sure the reference power supply is entered from the V4 pin.
Note:When LCDCTL1 is set to "0", input voltage from V4 pin should be kept within 2.7 V V4 VDD.
VDD C1 C0 V4 V3 V2 V1 C C C C C VSS
VDD C1 C0 V4 V3 V2 V1 C C C C C VSS R1 (Adjustment of contrast)
SEG COM
SEG COM
R2
(c) Example of voltage division from VDD (relative to V4 pin)
(d) Example of voltage division from VDD (relative to V4 pin) Note: C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
Figure 16-3 Method of Connecting Booster Circuit without Using a Regulator
Page 166
TMP86CS25AFG
16.5 LCD Display Operation 16.5.1Setting display data
Display data is stored in display data area (128 bytes in addresses 0F00H to 0F7FH) provided in DBR. Display data stored in the display data area is automatically read by hardware and sent to the LCD driver. The LCD driver generates segment and common signals according to display data and the driving method. Thus, display patterns can be changed simply by rewriting the contents of display data area in the program. Table 16-2 shows the correspondence between display data areas and SEG/COM pins. The light comes on when display data is "1" and it goes out when "0". Because the number of pixels that can be driven varies with the method of driving the LCD, the number of bytes in the display data area used to store display data also varies. Thus, bytes not used to store display data and data memory corresponding to ddresses not connected to the LCD can be used for storing generally processed data. (See Table 16-3)
Note:Because the contents of display data area become unstable at powering on, execute the initialize routine for the initial setting.
Table 16-2 LCD Display Data Area (DBR)
0F00H 0F01H 0F02H 0F03H 0F04H 0F05H 0F06H 0F07H 0F08H 0F09H 0F0AH 0F0BH 0F0CH 0F0DH 0F0EH 0F0FH SEG7 to SEG0 0F10H 0F11H 0F12H 0F13H 0F14H 0F15H 0F16H 0F17H 0F18H 0F19H 0F1AH 0F1BH 0F1CH 0F1DH 0F1EH 0F1FH SEG15 to SEG8 0F20H 0F21H 0F22H 0F23H 0F24H 0F25H 0F26H 0F27H 0F28H 0F29H 0F2AH 0F2BH 0F2CH 0F2DH 0F2EH 0F2FH SEG23 to SEG16 0F30H 0F31H 0F32H 0F33H 0F34H 0F35H 0F36H 0F37H 0F38H 0F39H 0F3AH 0F3BH 0F3CH 0F3DH 0F3EH 0F3FH SEG31 to SEG24 0F40H 0F41H 0F42H 0F43H 0F44H 0F45H 0F46H 0F47H 0F48H 0F49H 0F4AH 0F4BH 0F4CH 0F4DH 0F4EH 0F4FH SEG39 to SEG32 0F50H 0F51H 0F52H 0F53H 0F54H 0F55H 0F56H 0F57H 0F58H 0F59H 0F5AH 0F5BH 0F5CH 0F5DH 0F5EH 0F5FH SEG47 to SEG40 0F60H 0F61H 0F62H 0F63H 0F64H 0F65H 0F66H 0F67H 0F68H 0F69H 0F6AH 0F6BH 0F6CH 0F6DH 0F6EH 0F6FH SEG55 to SEG48 0F70H 0F71H 0F72H 0F73H 0F74H 0F75H 0F76H 0F77H 0F78H 0F79H 0F7AH 0F7BH 0F7CH 0F7DH 0F7EH 0F7FH SEG59 to SEG56 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 COM10 COM11 COM12 COM13 COM14 COM15
Table 16-3 Areas Used to Store Display Data
Driving Method 1/16 Duty 1/8 Duty 1/4 Duty COM number to be used COM15 to COM0 COM7 to COM0 COM3 to COM0
Page 167
16. LCD Driver
16.6 Method of Controlling LCD Driver TMP86CS25AFG
16.5.2Blanking
The LCD display can be blanked by clearing DISST to "0". Blanking extinguishes the LCD by outputting GND level to COM/SEG pins. If the STOP mode is entered while the LCD display is on, DISST is cleared to "0" and blanking is performed automatically. If the STOP mode is then reverted, DISST is set to "1" and display is resumed automatically.
Note:At reset, the segment dedicated pins (SEG39 to SEG0) and common output becomes GND level, whereas the I/O port/segment shared pins (P1,P3,P5 ports) output, the I/O port/common shared pins (P3,P7 ports) output become the high-impedance state. Thus, if an external reset input lasts for a significant length of time, it may affect the LCD display such as blurring.
16.6 Method of Controlling LCD Driver
16.6.1 Initial setting
The procedure of initial setting is shown below.
Example :When 60 seg x 8 com, 1/8 duty , 5 V-system LCD operates with fc = 8 MHz (at VDD = 5 V)
LD (LCDCTL1), 10010100B ; 1/8 duty, LCD reference voltage (VDD = V4), booster circuit enable set
Port setting
; Set port condition for LCD related pins
LD
(LCDCTL1), 10010101B
; LCD display enable set
16.6.2 Storing display data
Display data is normally prepared as fixed data in the program memory (ROM) and stored in the display data area by a load instruction. Example 1: Corresponding to the connection and display using a 1/8 duty LCD shown in Figure 16-4, the Table 16-4 shows display data and Figure 16-5 shows displyay timing.
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 SEG0 SEG59
Figure 16-4 Example of Display Data (1/8 duty)
Page 168
TMP86CS25AFG
Table 16-4 Example of Display Data (1/8 duty)
SE G 0 Bit 0 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 0F00H 0F01H 0F02H 0F03H 0F04H 0F05H 0F06H 0F07H 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE G 1 Bit 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE G 2 Bit 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 SE G 3 Bit 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE G 4 Bit 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE G 5 Bit 5 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 SE G 6 Bit 6 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 SE G 7 Bit 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 DF 24 24 24 24 24 C4 00 0F10H 0F11H 0F12H 0F13H 0F14H 0F15H 0F16H 0F17H SE G 8 Bit 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 SE G 9 Bit 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 SE G 10 Bit 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 SE G 11 Bit 3 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 SE G 12 Bit 4 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 SE G 13 Bit 5 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 SE G 14 Bit 6 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 SE G 15 Bit 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 B9 C6 86 BA C2 C6 B9 00 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** ***
DBR
HEX
DBR
HEX
Tfame
COM0
V4 V3 V2 V1 VSS
COM1
COM2
COM7
SEG0
V4
SEG0-COM0
VSS V4
OFF (Extinguish) ON (Light)
SEG0-COM1
OFF (Extinguish)
Figure 16-5 Example of Display Timing (1/8 duty)
Page 169
16. LCD Driver
16.6 Method of Controlling LCD Driver TMP86CS25AFG
Example 2: Corresponding to the connection and display using a 1/16 duty LCD shown in Figure 16-6, Table 16-5 shows display data and Figure 16-7 shows display timing.
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 COM10 COM11 COM12 COM13 COM14 COM15 SEG0 SEG59
Figure 16-6 Example of Display Data (1/16 duty)
Table 16-5 Example of Display Data (1/16 duty)
SE G 0 Bit 0 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 COM10 COM11 COM12 COM13 COM14 COM15 0F00H 0F01H 0F02H 0F03H 0F04H 0F05H 0F06H 0F07H 0F08H 0F09H 0F0AH 0F0BH 0F0CH 0F0DH 0F0EH 0F0FH 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE G 1 Bit 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE G 2 Bit 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 SE G 3 Bit 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE G 4 Bit 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE G 5 Bit 5 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 SE G 6 Bit 6 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 SE G 7 Bit 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 DF 24 24 24 24 24 C4 00 C4 24 04 04 84 44 E4 00 0F10H 0F11H 0F12H 0F13H 0F14H 0F15H 0F16H 0F17H 0F18H 0F19H 0F1AH 0F1BH 0F1CH 0F1DH 0F1EH 0F1FH SE G 8 Bit 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 SE G 9 Bit 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 SE G 10 Bit 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 SE G 11 Bit 3 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 SE G 12 Bit 4 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 SE G 13 Bit 5 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 SE G 14 Bit 6 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 SE G 15 Bit 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 B9 C6 86 BA C2 C6 B9 00 39 46 42 B9 C0 C4 3B 00 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** ***
DBR
HEX
DBR
HEX
Page 170
TMP86CS25AFG
Tfame
COM0
V4 V3 V2 V1 VSS
COM1
COM2
COM15
SEG0
V4
SEG0-COM0
VSS V4
ON (Light)
OFF (Extinguish)
SEG0-COM1
OFF (Extinguish)
Figure 16-7 Example of Display Timing (1/16 duty)
Page 171
16. LCD Driver
16.6 Method of Controlling LCD Driver TMP86CS25AFG
Page 172
TMP86CS25AFG
17. Input/Output Circuitry
17.1 Control Pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP86CS25AFG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Osc. enable
fc VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (high-frequency) Rf = 1.2 M (typ.) RO = 1.0 k (typ.)
VDD
XIN XOUT Input Output
Rf
XIN XTEN
XOUT
Osc. enable
fs VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (Low-frequency) Rf = 6 M (typ.) RO = 220 k (typ.)
XTIN XTOUT
Input Output
VDD R
Rf
XTIN
XTOUT
VDD R
RESET
RIN
I/O
Reset input
Address trap reset Watchdog timer reset System clock reset
Sink open drain output Hysteresis input Pull-up resistor RIN = 220 k (typ.) R = 1 k (typ.)
VDD
TEST Input
R RIN
D1
Pull-down resistor RIN = 70 k (typ.) R = 1 k (typ.)
Note: The TEST pin of the TMP86PS25 does not have a pull-down resistor and protect diode (D1). Fix the TEST pin at low-level.
Page 173
17. Input/Output Circuitry
17.2 Input/Output Ports TMP86CS25AFG
17.2 Input/Output Ports
Port I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Initial "High-Z" P1LCR/P7LCR SEG output
P1 P7 I/O Sink open drain output Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
R
Data output Input from output latch Pin input
Initial "High-Z" P5LCR SEG output
P5 I/O Sink open drain output R = 100 (typ.)
R
Data output Input from output latch Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
VDD
Sink open drain output Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
P2
I/O
Data output Input from output latch Pin input
R
Initial "High-Z" P3LCR
P30 P31 P32 P33
SEG output
I/O
Data output Input from output latch Pin input
R
Sink open drain output Hysteresis input High current output (Nch) R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" P3LCR
P34 P35 P36
COM output
I/O
Data output Input from output latch Pin input
R
Sink open drain output Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" Data output
P6 I/O
VDD
Tri-state I/O Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
R
Disable
Pin input
Note: Port P1, P3, P5 and P7 are sink open drain output. But they are also used as a segment output of LCD. Therefore, absolute maximum ratings of port input voltage should be used in -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 volts.
Page 174
TMP86CS25AFG
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operation, even for an instant. Any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. If any absolute maximum rating is exceeded, a device may break down or its performance may be degraded, causing it to catch fire or explode resulting in injury to the user. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that no absolute maximum rating value will ever be exceeded.
(VSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply Voltage Input Voltage Output Voltage Symbol VDD VIN VOUT IOUT1 Output Current (Per 1 pin) IOUT2 IOUT3 Output Current (Total) Power Dissipation [Topr = 85C] Soldering Temperature (Time) Storage Temperature Operating Temperature IOUT2 IOUT3 PD Tsld Tstg Topr P6 Port P1, P2, P34 to P36, P5, P6, P7 Port P30 to P33 Port P1, P2, P34 to P36, P5, P6, P7 Port P30 to P33 Port Pins Rating -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -1.8 3.2 30 60 80 350 260 (10 s) -55 to 125 -40 to 85 C mW mA Unit V V V
Page 175
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.2 Recommended Operating Condition TMP86CS25AFG
18.2 Recommended Operating Condition
The recommended operating conditions for a device are operating conditions under which it can be guaranteed that the device will operate as specified. If the device is used under operating conditions other than the recommended operating conditions (supply voltage, operating temperature range, specified AC/DC values etc.), malfunction may occur. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that the recommended operating conditions for the device are always adhered to.
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Pins fc = 16 MHz Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode IDLE0, 1, 2 mode NORMAL1, 2 mode IDLE0, 1, 2 mode NORMAL1, 2 mode IDLE0, 1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP0, 1, 2 mode STOP mode VIH1 Input High Level VIH2 VIH3 VIL1 Input Low Level VIL2 VIL3 V1IN V2IN LCD Reference Voltage Range V3IN V4IN V4IN V1 V2 V3 V4 V4#2 LCDCTL1 = "0" VDD = 1.8 V to 5.5 V Clock Frequency fc XIN, XOUT VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V fs XTIN, XTOUT 30.0 1.0 LCDCTL1 = "1" VDD < V4#1 Except Hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except Hysteresis input Hysteresis input VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 2.7 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 VDD x 0.90 VDD x 0.30 0 VDD x 0.25 VDD x 0.10 1.375 2.750 4.125 5.500 VDD 4.2 8.0 16.0 34.0 kHz MHz VDD V 1.8 (Note1) Min 4.5 Max Unit
fc = 8 MHz Supply Voltage VDD fc = 4.2 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz
2.7 5.5
#1 #2
When LCDCTL1 is set to "1", always keep the condition of VDD < V4. When LCDCTL1 is set to "0", always supply the reference voltage from V4 pin.
Note 1: When the supply voltage is VDD=1.8 to 2.0V, the operating tempreture is Topr= -20 to 85 C.
Page 176
TMP86CS25AFG
18.3 DC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Hysteresis Voltage Symbol VHS IIN1 Input Current IIN2 IIN3 Input Resistance Output Leakage Current Output High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output Low Current Supply Current in NORMAL 1, 2 mode Supply Current in IDLE0, 1, 2 mode Supply Current in SLOW1 mode Supply Current in SLEEP1 mode Supply Current in SLEEP0 mode Supply Current in STOP mode RIN1 RIN2 ILO VOH2 VOL IOL Pins Hysteresis input TEST Sink Open Drain, Tri-state Port
RESET, STOP
Condition
Min -
Typ. 0.9
Max -
Unit V
VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.5 V/0 V
-
-
2
A
TEST Pull-Down
RESET Pull-Up
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 0 V VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V/0 V VDD = 4.5 V, IOH = -0.7 mA VDD = 4.5 V, IOL = 1.6 mA VDD = 4.5 V, VOL = 1.0 V VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V fc = 16 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz
- 100 - 4.1 - - - - -
70 220 - - - 20 6.0 4.2 8.5 5.0 3.0
- 450 2 - 0.4 - 7.0
k
Sink Open Drain, Tri-state Port Tri-state Port Except XOUT and P30 to P33 Port High Current Port (P30 to P33 Port)
A
V
mA
mA 5.0 25 15 A - 13
IDD
VDD = 3.0 V VIN = 2.8 V/0.2 V fs = 32.768 kHz -
VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V
-
0.5
10
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25C, VDD = 5 V Note 2: Input current (IIN1, IIN3): The current through pull-up or pull-down resistor is not included. Note 3: IDD does not include IREF current. Note 4: The supply currents in SLOW2 and SLEEP2 modes are equivalent to those in IDLE0, IDLE1, and IDLE2 modes.
Page 177
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.4 AD Conversion Characteristics TMP86CS25AFG
18.4 AD Conversion Characteristics
(VSS = 0.0 V, 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog Reference Voltage Analog Reference Voltage Range (Note 4) Analog Input Voltage Power Supply Current of Analog Reference Voltage Non linearity Error Zero Point Error Full Scale Error Total Error VDD = 5.0 V, VSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 5.0 V Symbol VAREF VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = VAREF = 5.5 V VSS = 0.0 V Condition Min VDD - 1.5 3.0 VSS - - - - - Typ. - - - 0.6 - - - - Max VDD - VAREF 1.0 1 1 1 2 LSB mA V Unit
(VSS = 0.0 V, 2.7 V VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog Reference Voltage Analog Reference Voltage Range (Note 4) Analog Input Voltage Power Supply Current of Analog Reference Voltage Non linearity Error Zero Point Error Full Scale Error Total Error VDD = 2.7 V, VSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 2.7 V Symbol VAREF VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = VAREF = 4.5 V VSS = 0.0 V Condition Min VDD - 1.5 2.5 VSS - - - - - Typ. - - - 0.5 - - - - Max VDD - VAREF 0.8 1 1 1 2 LSB mA V Unit
(VSS = 0.0 V, 2.0 V VDD < 2.7 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) (Note 5) (VSS = 0.0 V, 1.8 V VDD < 2.0 V, Topr = -10 to 85C) (Note 5) Parameter Analog Reference Voltage Analog Reference Voltage Range (Note 4) Analog Input Voltage Power Supply Current of Analog Reference Voltage Non linearity Error Zero Point Error Full Scale Error Total Error VDD = 1.8 V, VSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 1.8 V Symbol VAREF VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = VAREF = 2.7 V VSS = 0.0 V 1.8 V VDD < 2.0 V 2.0 V VDD < 2.7 V Condition Min VDD - 0.9 1.8 2.0 VSS - - - - - Typ. - - - - 0.3 - - - - Max VDD - - VAREF 0.5 2 2 2 4 LSB mA V Unit
Note 1: The total error includes all errors except a quantization error, and is defined as maximum deviation from the ideal conversion line. Note 2: Conversion time is different in recommended value by power supply voltage. About conversion time, refer to "8-bit AD converter(ADC)". Note 3: Please use input voltage to AIN input Pin in limit of VAREF - VSS. When voltage of range outside is input, conversion value becomes unsettled and gives affect to other channel conversion value. Note 4: Analog Reference Voltage Range: VAREF = VAREF - VSS Note 5: When AD is used with VDD < 2.7 V, the guaranteed temperature range varies with the operating voltage.
Page 178
TMP86CS25AFG
18.5 AC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine Cycle Time tcy IDLE0, 1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP0, 1, 2 mode High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width tWCH tWCL tWCH tWCL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 16 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.25 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
31.25
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
(VSS = 0 V, VDD = 2.7 to 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine Cycle Time tcy IDLE0, 1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP0, 1, 2 mode High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width tWCH tWCL tWCH tWCL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 8 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.5 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
62.5
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
(VSS = 0 V, VDD = 1.8 to 2.7 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine Cycle Time tcy IDLE0, 1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP0, 1, 2 mode High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width tWCH tWCL tWCH tWCL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 4.2 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.95 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
119.05
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
Note 1: When the supply voltage is VDD=1.8 to 2.0V, the operating tempreture is Topr= -20 to 85 C.
18.6 Timer Counter 1 input (ECIN) Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition Frequency measurement mode VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V TC1 input (ECIN input) tTC1 Frequency measurement mode VDD = 2.7 to 4.5 V Frequency measurement mode VDD = 1.8 to 2.7 V Single edge count Single edge count Single edge count Min - Typ. - Max 1.0 Unit
-
-
0.5
MHz
-
-
0.262
Page 179
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.7 Recommended Oscillating Conditions TMP86CS25AFG
18.7 Recommended Oscillating Conditions
XIN XOUT XTIN XTOUT
C1
C2
C1
C2
(1) High-frequency Oscillation
(2) Low-frequency Oscillation
Note 1: A quartz resonator can be used for high-frequency oscillation only when VDD is 2.7 V or above. If VDD is below 2.7 V, use a ceramic resonator. Note 2: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be mounted. Note 3: For the resonators to be used with Toshiba microcontrollers, we recommend ceramic resonators manufactured by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. For details, please visit the website of Murata at the following URL: http://www.murata.com
18.8 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shown below. 1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath Solder bath temperature = 230 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used 2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath Solder bath temperature = 245 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows: Solderability rate until forming 95 % - When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 180
TMP86CS25AFG
19. Package Dimension
P-QFP100-1420-0.65A
Unit: mm
Page 181
19. Package Dimension
TMP86CS25AFG
Page 182
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI). Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software development. These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates. The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using. Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology. We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas. We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP86CS25AFG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X